qs8700 - EC PDF

Return to CD-ROM Collection Menu
Kodak DryView 8700/8500 Laser Imager
QuickSheets, Rev. F
Revision History
About this Guide
Section 1 – Introduction
Section 2 – Error Code (EC) QuickSheets
Section 3 – Symptom Troubleshooting
Section 4 – Machine Control System (MCS)
Section 5 – Image Management System (IMS)
78-6970-7254-0
Kodak DryView 8700/8500 Laser Imager QuickSheets
Revision History
1999 Rev. F i
Revision History
The original issue and revisions of the QuickSheets and subsequent revisions are identified as follows:
Original Issue Date (Rev. B): 12/96
An initial version of the DryView 8700/8500 QuickSheets went out on the KHI Service Collection
CD-ROM Revision G. This first CD-ROM version was called Revision A. However, no printed version of
the manual was made available at that release.
In order to keep both the CD-ROM and the paper version revision levels the same, they both were
released at Revsion B.
Subsequent revisions are listed and identified as follows:
Rev. C: 2/97, Rev. D: 5/97, Rev. E: 8/97, Rev. F: 4/99
The conversion to Kodak content and format included in this revision has resulted in a complete reprint of
the existing QuickSheets manual.
About this Guide
1999 Rev. F i
About this Guide

Audience
The primary audience for the DryView 8700/8500 QuickSheets is the Kodak service technician.
Organization
This manual is organized into five sections as follows:
Section 1 – Introduction – This section provides trouble analysis guidelines for locating
troubleshooting procedures in Sections 2 and 3.
Section 2 – Error Code (EC) QuickSheets – This section provides the QuickSheet indicated by error
codes.
Section 3 – Symptom Troubleshooting – Provides trouble analysis procedures for problems indicated
by symptoms other than error codes.
Section 4 – Machine Control System (MCS) – Provides theory of operation for components of the
Machine Control System.
Section 5 – Image Management System (IMS) – Provides theory of operation for components of the
Image Management System.
1999 Rev. F 1-1
1-1. Introduction
The DryView 8700/8500 QuickSheets Manual is designed to assist in troubleshooting the DryView
8700/8500 Laser Imager from Kodak. Use the following guidelines to find the appropriate trouble analysis
procedure in this manual:
If there is an error code (either displayed or in the error log), go to the appropriate Error Code (EC)
QuickSheet in Section 2 or go directly to the error code you need by using the Error Code Quick Index
located on the first page of Section 2.
1-2. DryView 8700/8500 Standard Schematic (IMS and MCS)

If there is no error code, go to the appropriate troubleshooting procedure in Section 3.
The information in this manual falls into two categories:
1. Trouble analysis procedures (Sections 2 and 3).
2. Theory of operation (Sections 4 and 5).
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ 8700 Standard
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Modem/ Keypad
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
LOS-Laser Optics System
IPB Image TDB 1 Copper (or Host)
Optics engine board MPC
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
board Processor Board Translator Daughter
Board (Copper) Keypad
Copper
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
X 0
OEB (or Host)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MDB #4
MDB #3
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Y
Data Cable MDB #2
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ SOL MDB #1

Attenuator VIB (Video Inter Board) 1
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Memory Image data
Daughter BNC cable (110 MhZ
Strobe
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Board - 16 Max) 110 Mhz PLL Optional 2 video users
MB each or DIB (Digital Interface or 2 digital
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Laser D/A 12 bit
(9 bit only) Board)
Diode image
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RS422 cable 0 Image data
data
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Brushes
LOS Serial Motors Power
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Attenuator Control Comm Drum Heaters Supply
Processor Solenoids
Cable cable cable and Thermistors
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Comm
to/from Board
Sensors
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IPB Rotating
Relay K801
Processor Board
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Power 120v
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Distribution Densitometer MultiFeed Beam Power
MIB Board Power
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MIB
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Local Panel Barcode Reader
Attenuator Control and Timing SCB
8700–230L
1999 Rev. F 1-2
1-3. DryView 8700/8500 Plus Schematic
8700 Plus KFEIB

HQ Keypad
or
IPB Image TDB 1 Fiber (or Host)
UKEIB
Processor Board Translator Daughter
Board (Fiber) 0 Fiber KFEIB
MDB #4 HQ Keypad
or
MDB #3 (or Host)
UKEIB
MDB #2
MDB #1 FIB
Memory 1 Image EVEIB 110 MHZ max
Fiber Interface Board
Daughter VEIB 64 MHZ limit
2 users. Any
Board - combination of video or digital.
32 MB each
(9 or 12 bit) 0 Image
Machine Interface Board
SCB MIB
Translator Daughter Board
System Controller Board
TDB
IPB
FIB Fiber Int Board
Image Processor Board DIB Digital Int Board
or
VIB Video Int Board
8700–240L
1999 Rev. F 2-1

2-1. Error Code (EC) QuickSheets
2-1-1. Error Code Quick Index
CD-ROM users can use the following error code quick index to go directly to the QuickSheet you need.
Clicking on the hypertext link takes you right to the error code QuickSheet.
Table 2-1. Error Code Quick Index
39 48 59 64 66 67 68V 68D 85 111 116 121

122 123 126 130 132 134 139 151 154 161 163 164
165 166 173 176 177 178 179 202 203 204 205 206
208 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 301
302 303 501 506 507 509 511 542 543 544 549 550
551 554 561 601 602 603 604 605 620 622 623 624
552
553
625 631 632 633 634 635 636 910 913
2-1-2. Error Code Descriptions

The following table lists the error codes with a brief description of the problem.
Table 2-2. Error Code Descriptions

Error
Code Description of Problem
EC39 EIC (or IB) not detected by IPB.
EC48 No End of File (EOF).
EC59 IPB unable to load parameters to EIB (or IB).
EC64 IPB detected error during acquisition.
EC66 Image memory address has crossed the boundary of
available memory.
EC67 Too many pixels received from EIB (IB).
EC68 Timeout waiting for pixels from EIC (or (IB).
EC75 Local panel failed.
EC85 Image memory full.
EC111 Nip Open Failed.
EC116 Pickup arm could not be moved to proper position.
EC121 Optics module attenuator error.
EC122 No Optics module.
EC123 Optics module temperature error.
1999 Rev. F 2-2
Error
EC126 SCB unable to detect EOL signal from optics module.
EC130 Supply door open.
EC132 No supply cartridge.
EC134 Supply cartridge empty.
EC139 Bad bar code.
EC151 Optics module PLL error.
EC154 NVRAM error.
EC161 Film jammed on multifeed detector.
EC163 Film jammed after multifeed detector and before platen
entrance sensor.
EC164 Film jammed on platen entrance or exit sensor.
EC165 Film jammed on mid transport sensor.
EC166 Multiple pickup attempts.
EC173 Platen door open.
EC176 Supply cartridge could not be opened.
EC177 Supply cartridge could not be closed.
EC178 Top cover open.
EC179 Left side door open.
EC202 Service override switch out.
EC203 Service override interlock failed.
EC204 Supply door interlock failed.
EC205 Top cover interlock failed.
EC206 Left side door interlock failed.
EC208 Left side door could not be opened.
EC221 Pickup top sensor failed.
EC222 Pickup middle sensor failed.
EC223 Film present sensor failed.
EC224 Pickup motor failed.
EC225 Rollback rack sensor failed.
EC226 Rollback home sensor failed.
EC227 Rollback motor failed.
EC228 Tongue depressor sensor failed.
EC229 Supply door could not be opened.
EC230 Pickup Arm Height Calibration failure.
EC301 HIB parity error 8.
EC302 HIB register read/write failed.
EC303 HIB lookup table memory failed.
1999 Rev. F 2-3
Error
EC501 Processor drum could not be moved.
EC506 Processor communication error.
EC507 Processor returning bad data.
EC509 Processor failed to warm up in allotted time.
EC511 Processor warming.
EC542 Jam in processor.
EC543 Jam in densitometer.
EC544 Jam in exit area.
EC549 Processor filter not present.
EC550 Clean processor and replace filter.
EC551 Processor heater 2 failed.
EC554 Processor temperature too high.
EC561 Invalid densitometer readings.
EC601 Invalid power monitor offset.
EC602 Invalid power monitor range.
EC603 Invalid optical density range.
EC604 Invalid laser dynamic range.
EC605 Attenuator test failed.
EC620 No film model found.
EC622 Corrupt film tables.
EC623 Bad transfer function.
EC624 Bad densitometer data.
EC625 Bad film contrast.
EC631 Film slow.
EC632 Film fast.
EC633 System near calibration limits (film almost fast).
EC634 System near calibration limits (film almost slow).
EC635 Dpatch slow.
EC636 Dpatch fast.
EC910 Imager detects no communication from IMS.
EC913 HIB parity error.
1999 Rev. F 2-4
EC39: EIB (or IB) not detected by IPB
Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IMX 952 Host Alarm
None. K65 Image acquire failed. L39 ALM, 39
Try acquiring again. EIB_NOT_DETECTED
Summary
The input module sent a command to the DEIB or VEIB on Fiber “A” and did not receive a response on
Fiber “B.”
Sequence of Events
1. When the imager is powered up, the IPB or Input Module loads the parameter set to the VEIB or DEIB
through fiber optic cable “A.”
2. The Enable LED on the VEIB or DEIB lights to indicate that it has received the parameter set and is in
a ready state. (On the DEIB the User 1 or User 2 LED also lights at this time.)
3. The VEIB or DEIB sends a response back to the input module on fiber optic cable “B.” If the input
module does not receive a response from the VEIB/DEIB, EC39 is logged.
Phone Fix – Operator Correctable
1. Cause: EIB is locked up.
Solution: Power cycle the EIB.
2. Cause: No power to the EIB.
Solution: Have the customer check power to the EIB. (Are EIB power lights on?)
On Site – Technician Correctable
1. Cause: Wrong type EIB is selected in MPC.
Solution: Reconfigure MPC/Setup/IMS/System.
2. Cause: Fiber optic cable is bad.
Tech Tip
Use a flashlight to test the fiber, or reconnect the fiber to a comm port and a UKEIB with 969 keypad.
Solution: Replace or reterminate the cable. (A crimp termination kit for fiber optic cable is available via
the Fed Ex Tool Bank.)
3. Cause: DEIB Transfer Clock Speed
• Two jumpers in the DEIB specify either single (10 MHz) or dual (12.5 MHz) transfer clock speed.
(Refer to Dryview 8700/8500 or DryView 8800 installation procedure.)
• When a DEIB is connected to an DryView 8700/8500, it must always be set for single (10 MHz)
transfer clock speed. This is the factory default setting.
• When a DEIB is connected to an DryView 8800, it must be set to match the Input Module jumper
setting. Refer to DryView 8800 installation procedure.
Solution: Try the EIB on a different Input Module or the other port on the FIB. Be sure to configure the
new Input Module or port for the type of EIB you are connecting.
1999 Rev. F 2-5
EC48: No End of File (EOF)
Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM X IM 952 Host alarm
None None L48 EOF_Timeout None
Summary
The IMS has timed out waiting for the End of Film (EOF) from the optics and SCB.
Sequence of Events
1. The IPB issues the print command to the SCB and the film is picked up.
2. When the IPB receives the SOL signal from the Optics module (which is under control of the SCB), the
IPB strobes data to the Optics module.
3. If the IPB does not receive the full number of SOL’s from the optics (via the SCB) within about 1 minute
and 45 seconds, EC48 is logged.
• This could occur because of a film jam that prevents the film from reaching the optics, or because
something in the imaging chain (optics, parity error, etc.) is malfunctioning.
• EC48 is usually accompanied by some other error such as a parity error, film jam, or optics error.
The errors accompanying EC48 may provide better troubleshooting information.
• The print job is retried a second time. If the second attempt also results in EC48, the print job is
killed and the image is deleted from memory. (The job is not killed if jams are occurring.)
1. Problem: EC48, No end of File, on every film, including density tests.
Cause: MPC/SCB(or MCS)/Config/Clear Border Lines is not initialized.
Solution: Set Clear Border lines and power cycle the DryView 8700/8500. Refer to MPC help screen
for more information on setting the field.
2. Problem: E48 and film jam errors together in the error log.
Cause: Film jams or pickup errors.
Solution: Refer to the appropriate EC QuickSheet for the jamming problem.
1999 Rev. F 2-6
EC59: IPB unable to load parameters to EIB (or IB)
Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IMX 952 Host alarm
None EC59 Acquire failed L59 EIB Par Write Error or ALM,39
L59 ACQERR EIB 0 (0r 1) ALM,65
Summary
EIB Parameter Write Error – the IPB could not load parameters into the EIB.
ACQERR EIB – EOT (End of Transmission) was not received from the host during the acquire.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 5-4, Digital Image.
Power cycle the EIB and DryView 8700/8500.
EC59 EIB Parameter Write Error: Check that the MPC is configured for the correct EIB or IB.
EC59 ACQERR EIB:
1. Problem: EC 59 with Siemens.
Cause: Some Siemens camera boards (the newer version) do not keep their STROBE signal levels at
a high or low state. It will float the lines when idle. This is referred to as tri-stating the signal. This
causes certain revisions of DEIBs to inconsistently interpret the data from Siemens.
Solution:
For new installations: When one of the above-mentioned modalities is included in your site plan, specify
that a DEIB-T Kit (78-8079-0736-1) be shipped instead of the regular DEIB Kit.
For existing accounts: If acquires are failing with EC59 or 68 perform the following checks:
Use an oscilloscope or meter to test for the presence and level of the strobe signals.
If both pin 6 and pin 7 are low (less than .2 volts) in an idle state (host not sending any data), the
host is tristating the strobe signal.
DEIB or DIB Chip/ Non-inverting input Inverting input Output

DEIB Port 0 U7/6 7 5
Refer to Section 5, Digital Image Acquisition, for more information. If you are unfamiliar with this
procedure and need assistance, contact a PST.
If Siemens is tristating the signal, order a DEIB-T (78-8079-0737-9). Order this part only if you are
getting EC59 or EC68 and you know the modality is providing a tristated output.
2. Problem: EC59.
Cause: If this is a new setup, the DEIB/DIB parameters may be incorrect.
Solution: Use a script file, if available. If this fails, try different parameters. Header Line mode is the
most common Header mode.
3. Problem: Acquires fail with EC68 or EC59.
Cause: If the DryView 8700/8500 reply to the host’s header information takes longer than the host is
willing to wait (host wait timing is out of spec), the host will error out and stop sending data.
1999 Rev. F 2-7
Solution: Set MPC/Setup/IMS/System/ Memory management to First fit. This will speed up the
DryView 8700/8500 reply after the header data, but will result in slightly decreased memory
performance. If this does not solve the problem, try the following procedure:
a. Set MPC/IMS/EIB/Config/Header Mode to Ignore Header Line. This will also speed up the DryView
8700/8500 reply to the host header.
b. Enter the values for Pixels Per Line and Image Lines that you retrieved earlier from the Image/Show
screen.
c. Be aware that while in Ignore Header Line mode, MPC/Image/Show will now display the values you
just entered in the DEIB config screen even if the host is not sending any data.
d. If Ignore Header mode fixes the problem, it can be used as a permanent fix only if the host sends a
single size image. If the host changes image sizes, Ignore Header Mode cannot be used.
e. If Ignore Header mode fixes the problem, you may want to set Memory Management in MPC back
to Best Fit to maximize utilization of memory.
4. Problem: Digital acquires work with 969, but fail with the DryView 8700/8500.
Cause: The DryView 8700/8500 cannot process digital image data as fast as the 969. (969 = 6 Mpixel
max, DryView 8700/8500 = 4 Mpixel max.)
Solution: The digital transfer rate of the host must be less than 4 Mpixels per second. Have the OEM
tech configure the modality for 952 setup. This will send a digital transfer rate of 1 Mpixel per second.
Note
The following hosts have a fast digital transfer rate: Picker MR and CT.
General Troubleshooting Tips

Use the other port on the DEIB/DIB.
Use the DEIB/DIB SMPTE TEST EPROMS (959SM/8-2-5) to send an image from the DEIB/DIB to the
969.
Use the Digital Test Board in your PC (959TB/1-1/92). Be aware that the Digital Test Board has a digital
transfer rate of 1/4 MPixel. Some hosts transmit at up to 6 Mpixels. Therefore if acquires work with the
digital tester, but fail with the host, the host digital transfer rate could be too fast, or the host signal
levels could be incorrect. Refer to Section 5-4, Digital Image Acquisition, for more details.
Use your scope or logic probe to check signals on the modality (red, green, blue).
Theory
Refer to Section 5-4, Digital Image Acquisition.
1999 Rev. F 2-8
EC64: IPB detected parity error during acquisition
Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm
None K72 Memory Error. Try L64 ACQ_Parity_EIB_0(or1) ALM,64
acquiring again.
Summary
The IMS detected a parity error in the data from the EIB.
Power cycle the EIB and the 8700/8500.
DEIB: Check with OEM to ensure that the parity and word format in the MPC/IMS/DEIB/Config screen
matches the host.
1999 Rev. F 2-9
EC67: Too many pixels received from EIB (or IB)
None. K72: Memory error. Try Acquir- L67 FIFO_OVERFLOW ALM,67

ing again.
Summary
Too many pixels received during an acquire.
Sequence of Events
The IMS is expecting a certain number of pixels from the EIB/IB based on the values entered for Horiz
Active Pixels in the config screen. If the input module receives more pixels than expected, the acquire fails
and EC67 is logged. The most likely causes of EC67 for the VEIB/VIB are:
• The parameter settings are incorrect, and the VEIB is therefore trying to digitize during a sync pulse.
• The video signal is not stable (e.g., due to an intermittent connection).
• The double gain parameter and/or the gain pot in the VEIB is not providing sufficient video amplitude
for the VEIB to digitize consistently.
Video:
1. Cause: The number of passes for a VEIB connected to a DryView 8700/8500 must be double that of a
VEIB connected to an DryView 8800, 969 or 959.
Solution: Change the video passes parameters per the help screen documentation.
2. Cause: This is a common setup problem when adjusting parameters with a VEIB.
Solution: Refer to the installation procedure in the service manual. For more detailed information on
VEIB setup, refer to VEIB operation in the 969 QuickSheet Video Appendix.
Digital
1. Cause: If this is a new setup, the DEIB/DIB parameters may be incorrect.
Solution: Use a script file if available. If that fails, try different parameters. Header Line mode is the
2. Cause: If the DryView 8700/8500 reply to the host’s header information takes longer than the host is
willing to wait (host wait timing is out of spec), the host will error out and stop sending data, or will send
the header data twice, etc.
Solution: Set MPC/Setup/IMS/System/Memory management to First fit. This will speed up the
performance. If this does not solve the problem try the following procedure:
screen.
1999 Rev. F 2-10
Cause: The DryView 8700/8500 cannot process digital image data as fast as the 969. (969 = 6 MPixel
max, DryView 8700/8500 = 4 MPixel max. )
tech configure the modality for 952 setup. This will send a digital transfer rate of 1 MPixel per second.
Note
Hosts with a fast digital transfer rate include Picker MR and CT.
General Digital Troubleshooting Tips

• Use the other port on the DEIB/DIB.
• Use the DEIB/DIB SMPTE TEST EPROMS to send an image from the DEIB/DIB to the DryView
8700/8500.
• Use the Digital Test Board in your PC (959TB/1-1/92). Be aware that this board has a digital
transfer rate of 1/4 MPixel. Some hosts transmit at up to 6 Mpixels. Therefore if acquires work with
the digital tester, but fail with the host, the host digital transfer rate could be too fast, or the host
signal levels could be incorrect. Refer to Section 5 Digital Image Acquisition Theory for more
details.
• Use your scope or logic probe to check signals from DEIB/DIB to host.
Note
On an DryView 8700/8500 stand-alone with HQ keypad, memory is not cleared unless Best Fit is
selected.
Theory
Refer to Section 5-4, Digital Image Acquisition Theory for more details.
1999 Rev. F 2-11
EC68 (Video): Timeout waiting for pixels from EIB (or IB)
None. K68: Image acquire failed. L68 TIMEOUT_EIB ALM,68
Try acquiring again.
Summary
The IMS has timed out waiting for the full number of pixels from the VEIB/VIB.
Sequence of Events
The IMS is expecting a certain number of pixels based on the Horiz Active Pixels and Image Lines
parameters in MPC/IMS/EIB/Config. If it does not receive the full number of pixels and lines, EC68 is
logged. The most likely causes of EC68 for the VEIB/VIB are:
• The parameter settings are incorrect, and the VEIB is therefore trying to digitize during a sync pulse.
• The video signal is not stable (e.g., due to an intermittent connection).
• The Double Gain parameter and/or the gain pot in the VEIB is not providing sufficient video amplitude
for the VEIB to digitize consistently.
Cause: The video cable is disconnected or bad.
Solution: Check/replace video cable.
1. Cause: The number of passes for a VEIB connected to a DryView 8700/8500 must be double that of a
VEIB connected to a DryView 8800, 969 or 959.
Solution: Change the video passes parameters per the MPC help screen documentation.
2. Cause: This is a common setup problem when adjusting parameters with a VEIB.
Solution: Refer to the installation procedure in the service manual. For more detailed information on
VEIB setup, refer to VEIB operation in the 969 QuickSheet Video appendix.
3. Cause: The PLL is not seated fully due to the plastic standoffs being too long.
Solution: Modify the standoffs so the PLL seats fully or replace with part number 26-1007-2402-5.
1999 Rev. F 2-12
EC68: DEIB/DIB
Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host Alarm
None. K68: Image acquire failed. Try L68 TIMEOUT_EIB ALM,68
acquiring again.
Summary
The Image Processing Board (IPB) has timed out waiting for image data from the DEIB/DIB. This could
happen either because the host system is not sending data, is sending invalid data, the DEIB/DIB is not
transferring the data, or the DEIB/DIB configuration is incorrect.
Sequence of Events
1. The IPB downloads parameters to the DEIB/DIB during the power up sequence.
• The DIEB/DIB “Enable” LED will light indicating that it has a valid parameter set.
• The Port 0 (or 1) will also light.
• The IPB will not download the parameters for that port again as long as acquires are successful.
Error State: If the IPB does not receive acknowledgement from the DEIB/DIB that it successfully
received the parameter set, EC39 will be logged. Refer to QS for EC39.
Error State: If an acquire fails, EC64-68 will be logged and the IPB will reload the parameters to the
DEIB/DIB on the next acquire after the first failed acquire.
2. The acquire command is received by the IPB, and the REQUEST line from DEIB/DIB to host goes high.
• When the Keypad Acquire button is pressed (or a host “Acquire” command is received). The IPB
then commands the DEIB/DIB to request the first line of data from the host. The DEIB/DIB does this
by asserting the REQUEST line high to the host.
Note
The DEIB XMT LED or DIB REQ LED will go on whenever the REQ line is asserted. However, it is
only a general indicator of the state of the REQUEST line. During normal transmission, it flashes on
and off so fast that its off state cannot be detected.
• Refer to Section 5-4, Digital Image Acquisition, for more information on the rest of this sequence of
events.
3. HOST responds to DEIB’s REQUEST line by asserting its STROBE line high.
When the host sees the REQUEST lines are high, it sets the data lines for the first message containing
the image size data (pixels per line and image lines) if in header mode. Most hosts use Header Line
mode. The host then causes the STROBE line to go high.
4. DEIB converts host parallel data to serial data and transfers it to the FIB .
The DEIB converts the parallel data to serial data, and transfers it to the FIB (or Input module). The rate
of the serial transmission between DEIB and FIB (or Input Module) is determined by the jumpers on the
DEIB (matching jumpers on the input module.) For the DryView 8700/8500, they must be set to 10
MHZ. Refer to the DryView 8700/8500 Service Manual.
5. DEIB reads header data from host.
When the DEIB sees the STROBE lines from the host go active, it will read the data on the lines.
1999 Rev. F 2-13
6. IPB asserts REQUEST line low while it finds the best fit (or first fit) in memory for the image size.
Note
On an DryView 8700/8500 stand-alone with an HQ keypad, memory is not cleared unless Best Fit is
selected.
After the IPB has successfully received the header information (pixels and lines in the image), it causes
the REQUEST line to go low while it calculates the best fit in memory to store the image.
Error State: If the DryView 8700/8500 reply to the header information takes longer than the host is
willing to wait, the host wait timing is out of spec:
• The host errors out and stops sending data with a resultant EC68 Acquire Timeout.
• Or, the host will send the header twice. (The IPB is expecting the second transmission to be image
data, and errors out with EC59 - No EOT - End of Transmission).
7. IPB requests first line of image data.
Once the DryView 8700/8500 or DryView 8800 has found a spot in memory for the up coming data, it
will reassert the REQUEST line to an active state for the next line of image data, and the host will
respond with ... STROBE line active, then idle, then active... for each pixel across the line.
• During normal transmission, the preceding sequence of events occurs very fast in relation to the
XMT LED. During normal transmission, the XMT LED turns on, blinks, and then stays on as the
image data is transferred.
• Be aware that the XMT LED is only a general indicator of the transfer of data and may flash too
rapidly to be able to use it for troubleshooting. For more precise troubleshooting indicators, refer to
Section 5-4, Digital Image Acquisition.
1. Cause: No power to DEIB/DIB.
Tech Tip
Visually inspect the DEIB/DIB. The POWER LED should be lit.
Solution: If the Power LED is not lit, try reconnecting the power cord. Check voltage at the wall outlet.
2. Problem: First acquire in the morning fails. Subsequent acquires are okay. (Problem only occurs with
the first acquire after the DEIB is powered on.)
Cause: If the DEIB loses power, it will lose its parameter set and fail the first acquire after the DEIB
power up. However, it will succeed on the second acquire. This situation could happen if the DEIB
receives it power from a host system that is powered down at night.
Solution: Check the power source for the DEIB. It should have a power source that is independent of
the host system. Refer to the above Sequence of Events for information on how and when the DEIB
parameters are downloaded to the DEIB from the IPB.
3. Cause: The host system does not always have the digital data ready to be acquired, and may need to
be in certain filming modes for digital transfer to the DEIB/DIB to occur.
Solution: Check with the OEM tech to be sure the operator is operating the host system correctly.
On Site – Technician Correctable:
1. Problem: EC68 with Siemens.
Cause: Some Siemens camera boards (the newer version) do not keep their STROBE signal levels at
a high or low state. It will float the lines when idle. This is referred to as tri-stating the signal. This
causes certain revisions of DEIB’S to inconsistently interpret the data from Siemens.
1999 Rev. F 2-14
Solution:
For new installations: When one of the above-mentioned modalities is included in your site plan, specify
that a DEIB-T Kit (78-8079-0736-1) be shipped instead of the regular DEIB Kit.
For existing accounts: If acquires are failing with EC59 or 68 perform the following checks:
Use an oscilloscope or meter to test for the presence and level of the strobe signals.
If both pin 6 and pin 7 are low (less than .2 volts) in an idle state (host not sending any data), the
host is tristating the strobe signal.
DEIB or DIB Chip/ Non-inverting input Inverting input Output

Refer to Section 5-4, Digital Image Acquisition, for more information. If you are unfamiliar with this
procedure and need assistance, contact a PST.
If Siemens is tristating the signal, order a DEIB-T (78-8079-0737-9). Order this part only if you are
getting EC59 or EC68 and you know the modality is providing a tristated output.
Note
On an DryView 8700/8500 stand-alone with an HQ keypad, memory is not cleared unless Best Fit is
selected.
2. Problem: EC68:
Cause: If this is a new setup, the DEIB/DIB parameters may be incorrect.
Solution: Use a script file if available. If that fails, try different parameters. Header Line mode is the
3. Problem: Acquires fail with EC67, 68, or 59.
Cause: If the DryView 8700/8500 reply to the host’s header information takes longer than the host is
willing to wait (host wait timing is out of spec), the host will error out and stop sending data, or will send
the header data twice, etc.
Solution: Set MPC/Setup/IMS/System/Memory management to First fit. This will speed up the
performance. If this does not solve the problem, try the following procedure:
screen.
1999 Rev. F 2-15
Cause: The DryView 8700/8500 cannot process digital image data as fast as the 969. (969 = 6 Mpixel
max, DryView 8700/8500 = 4 Mpixel max. )
tech configure the modality for 952 setup. This will send a digital transfer rate of 1 Mpixel per second.
Note
Hosts with a fast digital transfer rate include Picker MR and CT.
General Troubleshooting Tips

• Use the other port on the DEIB/DIB.
• Use the DEIB/DIB SMPTE TEST EPROMS to send an image from the DEIB/DIB to the DryView
8700/8500.
• Use the Digital Test Board in your PC (959TB/1-1/92). Be aware that the Digital Test Board has a
digital transfer rate of 1/4 MPixel. Some hosts transmit at up to 6 Mpixels. Therefore if acquires
work with the digital tester, but fail with the host, the host digital transfer rate could be too fast, or
the host signal levels could be incorrect. The digital tester is not an absolute test for cabling or
problems on our end. On many occasions the digital test board worked, but the problem was still
found to be in the cabling or laser. Refer to Section 5-4, Digital Image Acquisition, for more detail.
• Use your scope or logic probe to check signals from DEIB/DIB to host.
Theory
Refer to Section 5-4, Digital Image Acquisition, for more details.
1999 Rev. F 2-16
EC85: Image memory is full
None K85 Image Memory is full. L85 MEM_FULL FAI,MOV or
FAI,BSY
Summary
Not enough image memory is available to perform the store. This is a normal condition, but may be caused
by factors that are not part of normal operation.
Note
On an DryView 8700/8500 stand-alone with HQ keypad, memory is not cleared unless Best Fit is
selected.

1. Cause: The imager is having difficulty picking up films. This results in repeated pickup tries, which
slows down the system.
Solution: Try a different cartridge.
2. Cause: Out of film condition is not noticed by customer until memory is full.
Solution: Encourage customer to watch the keypad or host screen for film out message.
3. Cause: The user is pushing the system to the limits of its capabilities.
Solution: Add more memory.
Setup: Set MPC/Setup/Input/System/Memory Management to Best Fit. This will make the most efficient
use of the memory.
Note
On some digital modalities this may cause acquisition errors. If so, set back to First Fit.
Setup: Set the user with memory full problems to high priority via MPC/PC/IMS/Input/System/User
Priority.
Setup: Siemens. There are delay parameters in the MPC/COMM/Siemens screens that will slow down our
response to an acquire command by 1 to 3 seconds. This has the effect of slowing down the rate of
acquiring to reduce the likelihood of memory full conditions. SHPT keypad also has delay parameters in the
setup screen.
Note
Siemens note: The SHPT will send a “memory full” to Siemens, but no error will show up in the
DryView 8800/8700/8500 error log. This is normal. The SHPT will poll the laser for memory available,
and will not attempt an acquire if there is not enough available. Thus no EC85 will occur in the error
log.
1. Problem: Memory full condition locks up the host.

Cause: MPC/HOST/MemFull is set to the wrong message.
Solution: GE and Picker should be set to MOV. For others, refer to the TRM (Technical Reference
Manual) . Or try the other setting in MPC. There are only two choices (MOV or BSY).
2. Cause: Film pickup problems are slowing down the system.
1999 Rev. F 2-17
Solution: Check the error log for EC166 pickup tries. Refer to EC166 for more information on pickup
problems.
3. Cause: Other problems such as jams or AIQC problems are slowing down the system.
Solution: Look in the MPC Error Log.
Theory
Refer to Section 5-5, Image Processing, for more information on image memory.
1999 Rev. F 2-18
EC121: Optics module attenuator error
Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X is L121 ALM,60
P121 not operational. ATTENUATOR_ERROR
Summary
At power up, the SCB drives the optics attenuator to its home position. If the attenuator cannot be moved
to the home position after multiple attempts, EC121 Attenuator Error is declared. The imager must be
power cycled to clear the error.
Sequence of Events
At power up, the attenuator is stepped to the home position.
Note
If you are trying to monitor signals during power up, be aware that the optics tests are performed at
power up, and start running a few seconds after the optics kicker solenoid is energized three times.
All doors must be closed for the optics tests to run.

Power cycle the machine.
1. Problem/Cause: Poor connection at optics, SCB or MIB.
Solution: Reseat cables. Be sure to check the connection at the firewall between the electronic
enclosure and the optics. There have been several instances of poor connections at this juncture.
2. Problem/Cause: Bad optics module.
Solution: Replace optics.
General Troubleshooting Tip
1. At the SCB command window (MPC/Diag/SCB/Cmd) enter “set attenuator –999.”
MPC sensor display (MPC/Diag/scb/sensors) should show the attenuator in the home position (box
checked).
2. At the SCB command window enter “set attenuator 200.”
MPC sensor display should show the attenuator box unchecked.
• During normal operation the attenuator is stepped to the home position. Once the home position is
found, that position is called 0. Each attenuator position is one step of the stepper motor.
• Closed position (full attenuation, clear film) is typically 80 steps.
• Fully open position (minimum attenuation, dark film) is typically 480 steps.
The attenuator home signal can be monitored on the SCB at the bottom leg of resistor R8K1. The signal is
low when the SCB optics cable is disconnected, and is pulled high by the optics module when the
attenuator is in the home position.
1999 Rev. F 2-19
EC122: Optics module not present
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X is not L122 ALM,60
P122 operational. NO_OPTICS_MODULE
Summary
The SCB uses a dedicated signal OMCON to detect the presence of an optics module. Error State: If the
OMCON signal is not detected low during power up, EC122 (no optics module) is logged.
Check OMCON signal from optics module. Measure on the SCB, at the bottom leg of resistor R7M1. The
signal is high with the SCB/Optics control cable disconnected and is pulled low by the optics module when
operating normally.
1999 Rev. F 2-20
EC123: Optics module temp error
P123 operational. OPTICS_TEMP_FAIL
Summary
The optics module has failed to come up to temperature within 15 minutes.
Sequence of Events
The SCB will not run the optics diagnostics at power up until it sees the Y-galvo “YTempe” signal pulled low
by the optics module. The local panel will display “Printer is performing Self Test” until the temperature
reaches specifications.
Error State: If the optics module does not achieve a 46 - 56 C (115 - 132° F) temperature within 15
minutes, EC123 Optics Module Temp error is declared.
Tech Tip
You can check the YTempe signal on the SCB at the top leg of R7N3. It should be high when the SCB
optics cable is disconnected, and pulled low by an optics module that is up to temperature. If the signal is
not correct, check/reseat the optics control cable from the SCB to the optics module. Be sure to reseat all
three connections, including the bulkhead connection.
Note
This status message may be displayed longer than “____ minutes till ready” on the local panel if the
optics is not up to temperature.
1999 Rev. F 2-21
EC126: SCB unable to detect EOL signal from optics module
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X is not op- L126 OPTICS_NO_EOL ALM,60
P126 erational.
Summary
The SCB is unable to detect the EOL signal from the optics module for each line of the film.
Sequence of Events
The SCB is expecting a LINESYNC signal (EOL) from the optics module for each line of the film.
If it does not receive the full number of lines, EC126 is logged.
Note
This could occur because:
The IPB has stopped sending data to the optics due to a parity error in the image data. Look in the
MPC error log to see if parity errors are occurring. If they are, troubleshoot the “parity error.”
Note
While the DryView 8700/8500 is imaging the film, it runs into a parity error in the data. It then
reverses the border to clear for 16 lines so the image is flagged as bad. After the parity error, the film
will be imaged as normal.
• An intermittent or bad connection between IPB and Optics OR Optics and SCB.
• Bad optics module
1. Cause: The number of lines is different between the SCB and the IPB.
Solution: Set clear border lines via MPC/SCB/Config/Clear Border lines, and power cycle the
DryView 8700/8500.
2. Cause: The cable between the IPB and optics or SCB and optics is loose.
Solution: Reseat the cable
3. Cause: The control cable between SCB and optics has a loose fitting connection at the bulkhead due
to the cable securing screws bottoming out before the cables are fully seated.
Solution: First, check the control cable to see if the cable is loose and the securing screws are
bottomed out. Then shim the screws and sockets as needed to tighten up the two cables.
4. Cause: The fiber optic cable between the DryView 8800 and DryView 8700/8500 is bad.
Solution: Replace the cable. If replacing the cable does not fix the problem, try using a longer or
shorter cable, or try coupling cables together.
Tech Tip
The LINESYNC signal can be checked at pin 9 of U6L1 on the SCB. It should change states for each line
during imaging.
Theory:
Refer to Section 5-5-3.
1999 Rev. F 2-22
EC130: Supply door open
Close supply door. P130 K215: A cover is open on laser None. ALM,14
imager X.

Refer to Section 4-6 for more information on sensors.
1999 Rev. F 2-23
EC132: No supply cartridge
Insert cartridge. P132 K215 A cover is open on laser None ALM,12
imager 1.
Summary
The Cartridge Present Sensor is not actuated.
Problem/Cause: The rollback bar is not in the home position.
Solution: Rotate the rollback bar to the home position. Refer to Figure 4-25 for sensor locations.
Cartridge will not
insert if the rollback
arm is outside this
range.
User rollback knob.
8700–245L
Theory
Refer to Section 4-6 for sensor troubleshooting and to Section 4-8 for information on film sequencing.
1999 Rev. F 2-24
EC134: Cartridge is empty
Cartridge is empty. P134 K218. Supply cartridge is empty None ALM,10
on laser imager 1.
Summary
The SCB has counted 125 sheets since the cartridge was first loaded.
Sequence of Events
1. When a new cartridge of film is loaded, the film count in SCB NVRAM is set to 125.
2. For each film picked up, the SCB decreases the film count for that cartridge.
3. When the count reaches 0, P134 Cartridge is Empty is displayed on the local panel. The cartridge lid is
closed and the supply door solenoid is energized to open the door.
Note
The pickup arm is driven down to the cartridge a second time after each sheet is fed to check for film
empty, using the film out sensor for feedback. A cartridge may also be declared empty if the film out
sensor is deactuated when the empty check is made.
Tech Tip
There are actually 126 films in the cartridge. The last film is a packing sheet that has no emulsion. If the
NOVRAM film count is off and the 126th sheet gets fed, the film out switch on the pickup arm will detect film
empty after the sheet is fed. The 126th sheet will be processed normally, but without an image. However
the image will remain in memory and be printed when the new cartridge of film is inserted.
You can use cartridges with film remaining even if the bar code reads the cartridge as empty by doing the
following: At the MPC/SCB window, load the cartridge, double-click the window in the lower-right (local
connection) to open the SCB command window. Enter SET NVB=95,n where n = the number of films in
the cartridge.
Replace cartridge.
Cause: Film jams in the cartridge cause improper sensing of the film out sensor.
Solution: Clear the jam.
Check proper operation of the Film Out and Pickup Bottom Sensors.
Theory
Refer to Section 4-6 for sensor troubleshooting details and to Section 4-8 for information on film
sequencing.
1999 Rev. F 2-25
EC151: Optics module PLL error
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X is not op- L151 ALM,60
P151 erational. OPTICS_OUT_OF_LOCK
Summary
At power up and before each print the SCB checks the XPLL line from the optics module. The signal is
normally high, and is pulled low by the optics module when the optics module has determined that the X
galvo is in sync.
Error State: If the line does not pull low, EC151 Optics out of Lock is logged.
1. Cause: Optics module is bad.
Solution: Make the following check first;
a. Reseat the cables to the optics module, SCB and MIB.
b. If the problem remains, replace the optics module.
2. Cause: The control cable between SCB and optics has a loose fitting connection at the bulkhead due
to the cable securing screws bottoming out before the cables are fully seated.
1999 Rev. F 2-26
EC154: NVRAM error
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X is not op- L154 NVRAM_ERROR ALM,60
P154 erational.
Summary
The SCB NVRAM has an error.
1. Reinitialize the SCB NVRAM.
2. Besides the MPC parameters you backup, the SCB NVRAM also stores many other system and LUT
parameters that are not backed up via MPC. If the SCB is behaving abnormally, and you suspect that
the NVRAM’s corrupted, do the following:
a. Backup the system using a new filename. Keep the old backup.
b. Do an MPC/File/Restore on the printer having the problem.
c:\winmpc\scbinit0.sc for DryView 8700/8500 dual printer 0
c:\winmpc\scbinit1.sc for DryView 8700/8500 dual printer 1
This will reinitialize all the SCB NVRAM.
c. Power cycle the system. The local panel will be blank for the first 30 seconds.
d. Wait until EC154 and 622 appear on the local panel. Wait until the backup arm height calibration is
done. (There will be a clunking noise as the feed roller is moved up and down repeatedly. Let it
finish.)
e. Power cycle the system again. It should power up okay now.
f. Restore the MPC backup you made in step a. This will restore the drum temperature setpoints and
the parameters in the SCB/Config screen.
g. Set SCB/Config/Clear Border lines to 84 (default). Save the screen and power cycle the DryView
8700/8500.
h. It is possible the SCB NVRAM was corrupted at the time you made the backup. If the new backup
doesn’t work, try the old backup.
1999 Rev. F 2-27
EC161: Film jammed on multifeed detector
Media jam at supply cartridge. K211: Media is jammed in laser L161 JAM_SUPPLY ALM,21
Open left door and remove jam imager X. Check local panel.
in area 1. P161 (Toggles with:
Press supply button for 5 sec-
onds to open door. This will ex-
pose XXX sheets. P138)
Summary
A film is jammed on the multifeed detector.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-8 for flow charts of machine functions during film drive.
Cause: Films stick together and double feed, or as top sheet is being lifted and fed, the sheet underneath it
is pulled forward and mispositioned. This happens most at the beginning of the cartridge.
Solution:
• Remove the cartridge and try fanning the film.
• Try a new cartridge.
1. Cause: The multifeed board is out of adjustment.
Solution: Adjust using the procedure in the service manual.
2. Cause: Debris in the multifeed rollers.
Solution: Clean the rollers.
Theory
1999 Rev. F 2-28
EC163: Jam to exposure
Media Jam in transport. Open K211. Media is jammed in laser L163 Jam to Exposure ALM,22
left door and remove jam in imager 1. Check local panel.
area 2a. P163.
Summary
A film is jammed after the doublefeed sensor and before the platen entry sensor. The platen entry sensor
did not come on.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-8 for a description of film sensor functions during film drive.
Clear the jam. If the problem persists, try a new cartridge of film.
General Troubleshooting Tip: Refer to Section 4-6 for Sensor Troubleshooting Analysis.
Problem/Cause: The platen entry sensor is loose in its mounting, probably caused by the mounting legs of
the sensor being rounded.
Solution: Replace the sensor.
Theory
1999 Rev. F 2-29
EC164: Jam exposure
Media jam in platen. Open left K211: Media is jammed in laser L164 JAM_EXPOSURE ALM,23
door and remove jam in area 3. imager X. Check local panel.
P164
Summary
The media is jammed in the exposure area (while entering/leaving the platen). Either the platen entry
sensor did not turn off, or the platen bottom sensor (entering) or the platen exit sensor (leaving) did not
come on.
Refer to Figure 4-25.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-8, Film Sequencing.
Clear the jam.
Cause: The platen entry sensor is loose in its mounting, caused by the mounting legs of the sensor being
rounded.
Problem: Films are not being kicked out of the optics platen consistently.
Cause: The optics is not square with the transport assembly because one of the shipping screws was left
in.
Solution: Remove the shipping screw.
Problem: Films are not being kicked out of the optics platen consistently.
Cause: The optics is being pushed towards the back of the machine, this causes the film that is being
ejected from the optics platen to not hit between the two drive rollers in teh transport. Instead, it is stubbing
on the rear roller.
Solution: Determine why the optics is not centered.
Problem: The films are not being kicked fully and do not enter the transport nip rollers consistently.
Cause: The platen kick solenoid nylon bushings (Refer to Service Manual IPB Figure 9-14, item 29) are
too tight and bulge. This extra dimension does not allow the kicker to travel to its full extension.
Solution: Loosen the screen holding the nylon bushing.
General Troubleshooting Tip: MPC/Log/Printer Log/Kick Count will show how many times the kicker
solenoid was energized to kick the film out of the optics platen; this number should be 1, with an occasional
2 showing in the log.
Theory
1999 Rev. F 2-30
EC165: Jam before processor
Media jam in transport. Open left K211: Media is jammed in laser L165 Jam to Processor ALM,26
door and remove jam in area 2b. imager X. Check local panel.
P165
Summary
The media is jammed after exposure. The platen exit sensor came on, but the mid transport or processor
entry sensor did not come on. Refer to Figure 4-25.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-8 Film Sequencing.
Clear the jam.
Cause: The mid transport sensor or processor entry sensor is loose in its mounting, caused by the
mounting legs of the sensor being rounded.
Cause: The set screw on one of the drive motors is loose.
Solution: Secure the loose screw.
Theory
1999 Rev. F 2-31
EC166: Film pickup problems
Imager has difficulty picking up K211: Media is jammed in L166 PICKUP_TRY ALM,21
media. Replace cartridge. laser imager X. Check local L166 DOUBLE_PICKUP or
P166 panel. L166 NO_PICKUP
Summary
L166 PICKUP TRY—One pickup attempt has failed. If the next pickup attempt succeeds, no further errors
are logged, and nothing is displayed on the local panel. This error is transparent to the user.
If succeeding pickups fail, no more errors will be logged until the failed pickup retries match the number set
in MPC/SCB/Config/Pickup Retries.
L166 NO PICKUP—DryView 8700/8500 has failed to pick up the film after the number of attempts set in
MPC/SCB/Config/Max Pickup retries. The local panel will display “The imager has difficulty picking up
media. Replace cartridge. P166.”
L166 DOUBLE_PICKUP—One double feed has been detected by the multifeed board.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Sections 4-8 Film Sequencing.
Problem: Double pickup and no pickup
Cause: Films stick together and double feed, or as top sheet is being lifted and fed, the sheet underneath it
is pulled forward and mispositioned. This happens most at the beginning of the cartridge. When the next
attempt is made to feed a sheet, it will not pickup (the film is too far forward to feed correctly). The situation
usually corrects itself on subsequent pickup retries.
Solution:
• Remove the cartridge and try fanning the film.
• Try a new cartridge.
General Troubleshooting Tip: Refer to Section 4-6, for Sensor Troubleshooting Analysis.
1. Problem: Some of the early machines had a weaker solenoid that was intermittent in operation.
Solution: Replace with newer solenoid. (The weaker solenoid had the part # 9532 197388-01).
2. Problem: False Double Pickup.
Cause: Multifeed board is misadjusted.
Solution: Adjust according to the service manual procedure.
Theory
1999 Rev. F 2-32
EC173: Platen door open
Exposure cover is open. K215: A cover is open on laser None. ALM,16
P173 imager X.
Summary
Either the platen door laser interlock or the left door laser interlock is open.
Sequence of Events
The MIB distributes a constant +5V to the Optics Module. In addition, ±17 Volts from the MIB to the optics
module is interlocked through the two optics interlocks (platen door and left door laser interlocks) The
interlocks provide the ground return path for the Laser Power Relay coil on the MIB.
When the relay coil is energized (both doors closed) the relay contacts provide ±17V power to the optics
module and provide a +17V signal to the SCB which tells the SCB that the optics doors are closed. This
signal can be monitored at the service port between the MIB and SCB on pin 58. It should be high (+17V)
with both doors closed, and low (LASER INTLK OPEN) with the doors open or the cable disconnected.
LED DS6K3 on the MIB will light (amber color) when +17V is being delivered to the optics and the SCB.
Close the platen door or the left door. Make sure the platen door latch is turned fully clockwise.
Ohm out the optics platen door interlock and the left door laser interlock (top interlock of the two left side
door interlocks).
1999 Rev. F 2-33
EC176: Supply cartridge could not be opened
Cartridge could not be opened. K210: Printer error. L176 SUPPLY_ ALM,30
Check cartridge. P176 Check local panel on laser COVER_OPEN_ERROR
imager X.
Summary
The tongue depressor sensor failed to go high during the cartridge lid rollback process, generating the
message that the “cartridge could not be opened.” Refer to Figure 4-25.
Sequence of Events
Check the cartridge for a possible film jam.
1. Cause: Tongue depressor arm is bent.
Solution: Reform arm
2. Cause: Transport interlock SW407 is faulty.
Solution: Repair/replace switch.
3. Cause: MIB board has blown driver U8C1 due to the rollback motor leads rubbing against the frame
and shorting to ground.
Solution: Reposition and repair leads to motor. Replace MIB.
Solenoids: Use MPC/diag/solenoids to exercise the solenoid. (Refer to Section 4-7 for additional
information on solenoids.)
Sensors: Test proper operation of tongue depressor sensor with MPC/Diag/SCB/Sensors or use Breakout
Box with adapter cable. Refer to Sensor Troubleshooting 4-6-2.
Motors: Use MPC/Diag/SCB/Motors to exercise the rollback motor.
Theory
1999 Rev. F 2-34
EC177: Supply cartridge could not be closed
Cartridge could not be closed. Opening K210: Printer error. L177 ALM,31
door will expose XXX sheets. P177 Check local panel on laser SUPPLY_COVER_
(Toggles with: Press supply button for 5 imager X. CLOSE_ERROR
seconds to open the door. This will expose
XXX sheets in the cartridge. P138)
Summary
Sequence of Events
Refer to section 4-8 Film Sequencing.

Cause: Film jams.
Solution: Clear jam
3. Cause: MIB board has blown driver U8C1 due to the rollback motor leads rubbing against the frame
and shorting to ground.
Solution: Reposition and repair leads to motor. Replace MIB.
Solenoids: Use MPC/Diag/SCB/Solenoids to exercise the solenoid. Refer to 4-7 for additional information
on solenoids.
Sensors: Test proper operation of Tongue Depressor sensor with MPC/Diag/SCB/Sensors or use Breakout
Box with adapter cable. Refer to Sensor Troubleshooting 4-6-2.
Motors: Use MPC/Diag/SCB/Motors to exercise the rollback motor.
Theory
1999 Rev. F 2-35
EC178: Top cover open
Top cover is open. P178 K215: A cover is open on laser None. ALM,16
imager X.
Summary
The top cover of the DryView 8700/8500 is open, thus opening interlock switch SW802.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-6 for a description of the operation of the DryView 8700/8500 interlock switches and
sensors.
Close the top cover.
Refer to Section 4-6 for a description of the operation of the DryView 8700/8500 interlock switches and
sensors.
1999 Rev. F 2-36
EC179: Left side door open
Close left door. P179 K215: A cover is open on laser None. ALM,16
imager X.

Refer to Section 4-6 for information on troubleshooting interlocks and sensors.
1999 Rev. F 2-37
EC202/203: Service override switch out (or fail)
P202 Override switch is open. None. None. None

P203 Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X is not L203 OVERRIDE_ ALM,60
operational. INTERLOCK_FAIL
Summary
P202 – The service override switch is in the pulled out (electrically closed) position.
P203 – The service override switch is pulsed high and low alternately every 1 second. If the interlock is
pulsed high and a low is detected by the SCB, P203 is declared. The SCB shuts down all motors,
solenoids, and the local panel for safety reasons. The DryView 8700/8500 must be power cycled to correct
the problem.
Sequence of Events
SCB Sends to Override Interlock Feedback and SCB Interpretation of the State.
Interlock
Hi Hi = undefined Low = short
Low HI = open low = closed
(normal, non service mode) (service mode)
Note
There is a pull up resistor on the SCB. If the interlock is disconnected, the SCB will be in the normal
(non service mode) state.

P202 – Check override switch with ohmmeter.
P203 – Check wiring harness to service interlock for a short to ground.
1999 Rev. F 2-38
EC204: Supply door interlock failed
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X is L204 ALM,60
P204 not operational. FRONT_INTERLOCK_FAIL
Summary
The cartridge door interlock has failed and the SCB watchdog timer has shut down the SCB.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-6 for a description of the operation of the DryView 8700/8500 interlock switches.
Refer to Section 4-6 for information on troubleshooting sensors and interlocks.
1999 Rev. F 2-39
EC205: Top cover interlock failed
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X is not op- L205 ALM,60
P205 erational. TOP_INTERLOCK_FAIL
Summary
The top cover interlock has failed and the SCB watchdog timer has shut down the SCB.
Sequence of Events
The interlock switches in the DryView 8700/8500 are pulsed both high and low every 1 second for safety
reasons. The following chart explains the reasoning:
SCB Sends to Switch SCB Interpretation of Interlock State

Hi Hi = Door closed Low = Door open
Low HI = Short Low = Undefined
Refer to Section 4-6 for more detailed information.

1999 Rev. F 2-40
EC206: Left side door interlock failed
P206 operational. LEFT_INTERLOCK_FAIL
Summary
The left side door interlock has failed and the SCB watchdog timer has shut down the SCB. Refer to
Section 4-6.
Sequence of Events
The interlock switches in the DryView 8700/8500 are pulsed both high and low every 1 second for safety
reasons. The following chart explains the reasoning:
SCB Sends to Switch SCB Interpretation of Interlock State

Hi Hi = Door closed Low = Door open
Low HI = Short Low = Undefined
Refer to Section 4-6 for a more detailed explanation.

• Refer to Section 4-6 for information on troubleshooting sensors and interlocks.
1999 Rev. F 2-41
EC208: Left side door could not be opened
The left door has failed to open. P208 None. L208 LEFT_DOOR_FAIL None

1999 Rev. F 2-42
EC225: Rollback rack sensor failed
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X is not op- L225 Cartridge Rack Sensor ALM,60
P225 erational. Fail
Summary
The rollback rack sensor did not change states as expected after the cartridge was opened or closed.
Sequence of Operation
Refer to Section 4-8 Film Sequencing for a flow chart description of the process for opening the cartridge
lid.
Problem: MIB board blew chip U8C1 when opening cartridge.
Cause: Harness to rollback motor is incorrectly mounted, causing the harness to rub on the frame.
Solution: Secure harness away from frame. Replace MIB.
Theory
Refer to Section 4-8 Film Sequencing for flow charts of machine functions during film load and drive.
Refer to Section 4-6 for instructions for sensor trouble analysis.
1999 Rev. F 2-43
EC226: Rollback home sensor failed
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X L226 CARTRIDGE_BAR_HOME_ SENSOR_FAIL ALM,60
P226 is not operational.
Summary
The cartridge rollback bar home sensor is not functioning.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-8 Film Sequencing for description of the film cartridge load process.
Close the cartridge, open the left side door, and look for any jams near the rollback bar. Try rotating the
rollback bar to the home position.
Problem: MIB board blew chip U8C1 when opening cartridge
General Troubleshooting Tip: Monitor the sensor with MPC or breakout box. Refer to Section 4-6 for
sensor troubleshooting information.
Theory
Refer to Section 4-8 Film Sequencing for film sequencing description.
1999 Rev. F 2-44
EC227: Rollback motor failed
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X L227 CARTRIDGE_ ROLLBACK_MOTOR_ FAIL ALM,60
P227 is not operational. L226 CARTRIDGE BAR HOME SENSOR FAIL
L225 CARTRIDGE RACK SENSOR FAIL
Summary
The rollback motor has failed to operate during the cartridge load process.
Note: Failure of the rollback home sensor or rollback rack sensor will cause the same result.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-8 Film Sequencing for a flow chart description of the cartridge load process.
Close the cartridge, open the left side door, and look for jams, etc. near the rollback bar. Try rotating the
rollback bar to the home position (arrow up on the user knob).
Problem: MIB board blew chip U8C1 when opening cartridge.
General Troubleshooting Tip: Refer to Section 4-6 for sensor trouble analysis and Section 4-7 for motor
trouble analysis.
Theory
Refer to Section 4-8 Film Sequencing for descriptions of machine functions during film load and drive.
1999 Rev. F 2-45
EC228: Tongue depressor sensor failed
Printer malfunction. Make sure K210: Printer error. L176 ALM,60
transport in area 2 is latched. Check local panel on laser SUPPLY_COVER_
P228 and Cartridge could not imager X. OPEN_ERROR
be opened. Replace cartridge. or
P176 or Cartridge could not be L177
closed. Opening door will ex- SUPPLY_COVER_
pose XXX sheets. P177 CLOSE_ERROR
Summary
The tongue depressor sensor did not change states properly during cartridge lid opening. As a result, the
left door solenoid has been energized to open the door.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-8 Film Sequencing for a description of machine functions during the cartridge lid
opening process.
General Troubleshooting Tip:
• Test proper operation of tongue depressor sensor with MPC/Diag/SCB/Sensors or use Breakout Box
with adapter cable. Refer to Section 4-6.
• Test solenoids with MPC/Diag/Sol or use jumper to access solenoids. Refer to Section 4-8 in the
Service Manual for more information on solenoids.
1999 Rev. F 2-46
EC501: Drum could not be moved
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X L501 ALM,17
Lift top cover to reset processor. is not operational. PROCESSOR_DRUM_FAIL
P501
Summary
If the SCB did not detect the drum turning within about the last 4 seconds, EC 501 Drum could not be
moved is declared.
• Power is removed from the processor motor.
• The operator must open and close the top cover to clear the error.
Sequence of Events
1. The Processor Motor is enabled.
At power up, a 24VDC pulsating signal is applied to the processor motor. MIB Test points for the motor
will show this signal during normal operation. Refer to Processor Motor Enabled Section 4-7,
Figure 4-32.
2. The Processor Communication Board transmits and receives REFLECT (rotation) light. Refer to
Section 4-2, Processor (theory of operation), for a description of this process.
Tech Tip
The 8700/8500 sensor monitor cable and breakout box shows the REFLECT signal at the SCB input.
1. Problem: The clear plastic lens cap on DS4 on the PCB (Processor Communication Board)
emitter/collector has come off. Refer to Figure 4-6.
Solution: Replace the lens cap on photointerrupter (DS4) or order a new PCB. To replace the lens
cap, order a new photointerrupter, remove its cap, and install it on the original photointerrupter (DS4).
Do not remove the original photointerrupter from the PCB and solder on the new one.
2. Problem: The reflective plate on the RPB is dirty or deformed.
Solution: Inspect the reflective plate.
1999 Rev. F 2-47
EC506: No communication from processor
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X is not L506 PROCESSOR_COMM_ERROR ALM,17
Lift top cover to reset operational.
processor. P506
Summary
If the SCB does not receive communication from the drum Rotating Processor Board (RPB) after 10
attempts, EC506 Processor Communication error is generated by the SCB. The operator is instructed to
open and close the top cover to clear the error.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-2, Processor (theory of operation).
1. Lift and lower top cover to clear.
2. Power cycle the machine.

Problem: Error Code 506 – Processor Communications have failed after ten attempts.
Solution: The following checks should be made prior to changing any parts.
1. 60 Hz Phasing - Pull out the processor to its extended position and move the Processor
Communications Board out of the way. Refer to Figure 1. Using a dual trace oscilloscope, connect
channel 1 to pin 7 of U8K1 on the System Control Board (SCB). Connect channel 2 to pin 8 of U3 on
the Rotating Processor Board (RPB).
!
Caution
Energizing K801 will apply 117 VAC to the slip rings of the RPB.
Energize K801 by shorting the side of R4J8 that is connected to pin 20 of CN1308 to ground on the
Machine Interface Board (MIB). The signals on channel 1 & 2 should be out of phase.
If the signals are not out of phase, the wiring to the RPB is out of phase.
1999 Rev. F 2-48
Figure 2-1.
2. Slip Ring/Brush - Check that the slip rings and brushes are properly aligned. There should be no
signs of arcing. Arcing will cause an interruption in the power to the RPB. The brush holder mounting
holes are slotted so the holder could be cocked with respect to the slip rings. Adjust or replace as
necessary.
3. Drum RTD - While error code 506 is still present on the local panel, look at the temperature data to
determine what type of problem is occurring. To view the temperature data, enter the following:
MPC>LOG>PRINTER>PROCESSOR.RETRIEVE.
24125 24903 25405 10229 24108 24805 25418 10229 24101 24877 25469 10229 24108 24845 25528
10229 24117 24913 25409 10229 0 24888 25412 10230 0 24793 25471 10230 0 24876 25551 10230
0 24851 25434 10229 0 24935 25445 10231 0 24900 25520 10230 0 24805 25405 10231 0 24887
25415 10231 0 24867 25496 10230 0 24936 25386 10230
In the table below, raw data is arranged in columns for easier reading. The presence of “0’s” in one or
more of the zones indicates a bad RTD.
Table 1. Typical Temp Data
24125 24903 25405 10229
24108 24805 25418 10229
24101 24877 25469 10229
24108 24845 25528 10229
24117 24913 25409 10229
0* 24888 25412 10230
0* 24793 25471 10230
0* 24876 25551 10230
Zone 2 Zone 1 Zone 3 Ambient (on RPB)
0* 24851 25434 10229
0* 24935 25445 10231
0* 24900 25520 10230
0* 24805 25405 10231
0* 24887 25415 10231
0* 24867 25496 10230
0* 24936 25386 10230
1999 Rev. F 2-49
*Shows bad RTD. Typically, there will be numbers.
4. Processor Alignment Upgrades - Verify that the following upgrades are in the machine. If they are
not, replace the board. All new boards in stock at SPC contain the upgrade and can be ordered using
the original board part number.
a. Refer to Figure 2A - A 100 ohm resistor should be in parallel with R5 on the Processor
Communications Board (PCB). This will double the drive current to the emitter of DS2.
b. Refer to Figure 2B - A 100 ohm resistor should be in parallel with R14 on the RPB. This will double
the drive current to the emitter of D2.
c. Refer to Figure 2C - The four screws that attach the PCB to the shroud should be M3X6 mm
flathead screws, not panhead screws, in order to center the board.
d. Refer to Figure 2D - The three screws that attach the collar to the gear should be M4X50 mm
flathead screws, not panhead screws, in order to center the RPB. If you must replace the screws,
you will have to remove the reflective disk and the RPB.
Figure 2A. Figure 2B.

1999 Rev. F 2-50
Figure 2C. Figure 2D.
5. Emitter/Detector Alignment - Check that the emitters on the PCB and the RPB are perpendicular to
the board and that the detectors are flush to the board. See Figure 3.
Figure 2-2.
6. Emitters - Some of the emitters used on the PCB and the RPB have the chip within the LED, offset
from the centerline of the molded lens. See Figure 4. This may cause a misalignment problem.
Replace any boards that exhibit errors because of this problem.
1999 Rev. F 2-51
Figure 2-3.
7. Clock Optocoupler - Some of the optocouplers (IS01) used on the RPB have an oscillation problem
around the transition point. This created false clock signals which cause the temperature data being
transmitted from the RPB to the SCB to be out of sync. One or more “0’s” at the end of the ambient
temperature data (Table 2) usually indicates a clock problem on the WRAP. Replace any RPB’s that
have parts with a date code of C606 at IS01 if this problem is occurring.
Table 2. Temp Data with Clock Problem on the RPB
Raw Data
One or more “0’s” are at the end of each block of data. Most of the time, the
“0’s” follow the ambient temp data (109xx).
7571 7662 10195 0
7571 7664 10912 0
7574 10911 0 0
7658 10909 0 0
7574 7662 10908 0
7573 7662 10906 0
7713 7579 7663 10906
7579 7661 10905 0
7715 7580 7663 0
7575 7662 10904 0
7578 7666 0 0
7578 7658 0 0
7579 7666 10902 0
7579 7664 10900 0
7581 7665 0 0
7585 7667 0 0
7667 0 0 0
1999 Rev. F 2-52
Adjusted Data
Adjusting the information by shifting the ambient data to

the last location shows that we are losing data from one
or more zones for each reading.
Zone 2 Zone 1 Zone 3 Ambient
7571 7662 10915
7571 7664 10912
10911
7658 10909
7574 7662 10908
7573 7662 10906
7713 7579 7663 10906
7579 7661 10905
7715 7580 7663
7575 7662 10904
7578 7666
7578 7658
7579 7666 10902
7579 7664 10900
7581 7665
7585 7667
7667
8. Noisy AC Power - The AC power voltage is used to trigger the clock controlling the DryView
8700/8500 drum temperatures. Spikes on this voltage can cause false triggers. Some modality
operations may cause these spikes resulting in 506 Errors. Monitor the AC voltage. If voltage spikes
exist, install a Power Line Conditioner (PLC). The Oneac PLC (78-9998-0738-7) is available from
SP&LC Tool Bank.
9. False Clock Signals - The opto isolator, which is used to generate the AC clock for the temp control
circuit, is creating false clock signals and a 506 error code. The recommended solution is to replace
the board. All new boards in stock at SPC contain the upgrade and can be ordered using the original
board part number.
check for a10K resistor from IS01-4 to U6-13 on the back side of the board (Figure 6).
check for a .001 mf capacitor from U6-13 to U6-7 on the back side of the board (Figure 6).
check for a trace from IS01-4 to U6–13 on the front side of the board (Figure 5).
1999 Rev. F 2-53
Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-5.
Cause: Transmitter on the RPB (D2) not protruding sufficiently through the hole in the center of the RPB.
Solution: Reform D2. Insure the transistor aligns with the receptor on the PCB.
Cause: Suspected intermittent noise on line
Solution: On Version 1.14 or higher SCB SW retries 10 times before declaring no communication. Try a
different power source, or power conditioning equipment.
Problem: Intermittent 506’s.
1999 Rev. F 2-54
Cause: The polarity of wiring from the power module to the Rotating Processor Board (RPB) is reversed.
Use the following method to determine if the polarity of the lines is correct.
a. Open the top cover, slide the processor assembly out, and rotate the PCB out of the way.
!
Caution
The following procedure will send 120 VAC to the RPB and brushes.
b. Enable K801 to send 120v to the RPB by shorting the bottom leg of R4J8 on the MIB to machine
ground. Resistor R4J8 is located at position 4J on the MIB, just below the solenoid test points. You
should hear K801 click on and see LED D12 (green) light on the RPB.
c. Oscilloscope: Connect Channel 1 to pin 7 of U8K1 on the SCB. Connect Channel 2 to pin 8 of U3
on the RPB.
d. Set Volts to 5v and Time to 5 ms.
e. Observe the scope display. The two signals should be 180 degrees out of phase with each other.
If not, the wiring to the RPB is out of phase.
Solution:
Option 1. Check all the harness wiring from the power supply to the RPB and the 24VAC to the
MIB. Ensure that the correct wires are going to the correct connections.
Option 2. Switch the black and white wires on the brushes to the RPB. DON’T switch the green
ground wire!
Problem/Cause: Machines with serial numbers below 001681 have an old style processor comm board
and rotating processor board.
Solution: The new style board has the following changes:
• The first change is replacing the 100 ohm resistors with 47 ohm resistors on the Processor Comm
Board and on the rotating processor board. This increases the current to the communication LEDs
and detector, which results in stronger communication signals between the two boards.
• The second change involves using flathead screws to remove some of the tolerance in the boards
positioning. This should increase the relative alignment of the two boards.
• The processes for the board assemblies have been updated to indicate the need for component
alignment (both photo detector and LED).
1999 Rev. F 2-55
EC507: Processor returning bad data
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X L507 PROCESSOR_INV_ TEMP_DATA ALM,17
Summary
If after transmitting a request for status from the Rotating Processor Board (RPB), the SCB receives a
response, but the data is invalid (parity errors or corrupted data) or the reported drum temperature is
outside the specified 50° to 300° F range, the SCB generates the following message: “EC507 Processor
returning bad data.” The operator is instructed to open and close the top cover to clear the error.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-2, Processor (theory of operation), for details.
Open and then close the top cover to clear the error.
Cause: Drum temperature is less than 50° F due to storage in a cold room.
Solution: Allow drum to acclimate to room temperature.
1999 Rev. F 2-56
EC509: Processor failed to warm up in allotted time
P509 is not operational. PROCESSOR_WARMUP_FAIL
Summary
If the drum temperature is below 122.2 C, P511 Processor warming, xx minutes until ready is
displayed. If the processor does not warm up in the time calculated by the SCB (and displayed on the local
panel), EC509 Processor failed to warm up in allotted time is generated. The top cover must be lifted to
clear this error.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-2, Processor (theory of operation) for details.
1. Problem: EC 552 or EC 553. Slow warm up/drum heater fail.
Cause: Heater fuse is blown. The current fuses are known to have about a 3 to 4 year life before they
fail due to age. A new style fuse is being redesigned.
Note: Some of the early DryView 8700/8500’s did not have the connection clip soldered to the fuse
leads. This created a poor connection with resultant premature failure of the fuses.
Solution: If a fuse has failed due to age, replace all three fuses. Refer to Service Manual disassembly
section. Solder connection clips to the fuse leads using a heat sink to keep the heat away from the
fuse.
2. Problem: EC 551/552/553. Rotating Processor Boards blowing.
Cause: Heat sink for transistor is not mounted correctly, causing the transistor to burn out.
Solution: Order a new RPB, and inspect the new board to ensure that the transistor is sandwiched
between the two heat sinks.
1999 Rev. F 2-57
EC511: Processor Warming
Please wait XXX minutes for K222: Film processor X is not None. None.
processor to finish warming. ready. Minutes to ready: TTT.
P511
Summary
If the temperature is below 122.2 C, P511 Processor warming, xx minutes until ready is displayed.
1999 Rev. F 2-58
EC542: Jam in processor interior
Media jam at processor. Lift top K211. Media is jammed in laser L542 Jam in processor interior. ALM,17
cover and remove all media in imager 1. Check local panel.
area 4. P542
Summary
The media is jammed in the processing drum. The processor entrance sensor came on but the
densitometer sensor did not come on.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-8, Film Sequencing, for a flow chart description of machine functions as film drives
through the processor.
Clear jam. Make sure the processor cover latches.
Note
All images on the current sheet are erased from memory and will have to be refilmed.

Jam at Drum/Stripper Interface
Jam Position: Film is found jammed right at the interface between the drum and stripper.
Film Description: Leading edge of film “clear d_min line” has a bent or severely damaged corner. This
results when one corner of the leading edge of the film gets caught behind the stripper or between the
drum and stripper. The total length of the film gets crunched (accordion style).
Cause:
1. Film is too aggressively adhering to the drum.
2. Larger than 9 Mil stripper gap as measured at the corners.
Solution:
1. Properly adjust stripper gap to .009” using procedure in service manual.
2. Coat drum with drum conditioner.
3. Possible temporary fix: Run 10 to 20 films upside down in the cartridge to deposit fluorocarbons on
drum. (Lasts for 1 to 2 days or approximately 100 sheets of film.)
Note
Stripper Adjustment
As film is fed through the processor, the drum expands slightly over time due to absorption of
chemicals from the film. This expansion is only in the film path while the stripper adjusts ride on a
part of the drum that does not expand. Because of this, the gap should be checked (and adjusted,
if necessary) at every service call.
The stripper may not be perfectly straight. It is acceptable to have stripper that is closer to the
drum at the ends than at the center. The ends are to be .009”+/-.001”. The stripper should always
bow away from the drum in the center and not towards the center of the drum. If the film corners
strip, the rest of the film will follow. Replace any stripper that is closer to the drum in the center
than on the edges.
1999 Rev. F 2-59
Note
Coating Drum with Fluorocarbon
This solution should last for over 10,000 films unless the drum surface is cleaned or the solution is
rubbed off for some reason (i.e., a stripper gap that is too tight, etc.) In addition, do not apply while the
drum is hot but allow to cool by removing it from the machine. After 10 minutes, the drum should be
cool enough to treat. Use the complete bottle to treat one drum.
Jam at Cooling Section Due to Stall-Out

Jam Position: Film is found stopped with leading edge on cooling section (after the stripper, but before the
densitometer).
Film Description: Leading edge of film is flat and undamaged. Trailing edge is still on drum and is
overdeveloped. A small amount of film wrinkling (accordion style) may occur on the trailing edge, but for
the most part the film is undamaged.
Cause: Intermittent toggle of processor entry sensor (SW302). If this switch toggles before it is truly the
end of the sheet, the imager thinks the trailing edge has cleared the processor entrance and begins the
timing countdown for the leading edge to reach the densitometer sensor (SW301). The leading edge does
not reach the densitometer sensor in time, and film stops where it is.
Solution:
1. Verify processor entry sensor “feet” are fully clipped in.
2. Verify processor entrance switch flag is centered in slot, undamaged, and free to move.
3. Verify that entire processor module is pushed back and fully seated in the back/rear of the frame.
4. Verify processor entrance switch and Densitometer switch are working correctly. Refer to QS4-3
Sensors and Interlocks for sensor monitoring information.
Jam at Cooling Section Due to Felt Pad
Jam Position: Film is stopped with leading edge on felt or cooling plate (after stripper, but before
densitometer).
Film Description: Leading edge of film, first 4 inches of film, and especially leading edge corners are
undamaged. The remaining 13 inches of trailing edge are severely wrinkled (accordion style).
1. Cause: Hump in the cooling section felt or failure of the felt to lie flat. This causes the leading edge of
the film to “dig” into the felt and jam at the cooling section.
Solution: Verify the cooling section felt pad is flat and smooth. Try to smooth as required.
2. Cause: Processor motor shorted MIB drive board. Refer to 3.5 MIB for driver locations. Wiring harness
is rubbing on frame and shorted to ground.
Solution: Repair wiring harness. Replace MIB.
3. Cause: Motor stopped because of shorted driver on MIB. Wiring harness rubbing on frame and shorted
to ground.
Solution: Repair wiring harness. Replace MIB.
1999 Rev. F 2-60
4. Cause: Developer housing not properly closing. This causes the idler rollers to not fully contact the
drum.
Solution:
• Ensure that the clam shell rests on the top of the end bearings and still latches. If there is a gap
there, the roller springs are compressed to their fullest, inhibiting roller rotation. Or there is
interference somewhere else that prevents full contact of the processor rollers.
• Instruct the user to make sure that the clam shell is latched securely after they have opened it. They
should push firmly after the clam shell latches.
• Lubricate the idle rollers with Krytox lubricant 26-1012-1130-3.
5. Cause: The first DryView 8700/8500’s built, had troublesome processor assemblies. For example,
they do not always close properly or the drum is lifted when the upper clam shell is raised.
Solution: In these instances, and when the serial number is lower than 8700900, you may need to
replace the processor assembly. Call Service Engineering before proceeding with this remedy.
1999 Rev. F 2-61
EC543: Jam in densitometer
Media jam at processor area. K211. Media is jammed in laser L543 Jam at densitometer. ALM,17
Lift top cover and remove all imager 1. Check local panel.
media in area 4. P543
Summary
The media is jammed in the processing module at the densitometer. The densitometer sensor came on but
the exit sensor did not.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-8, Film Sequencing, for a description of machine functions as film is driven through the
processor.
Clear the jam.
Note: All images on the current sheet are erased from memory and will have to be refilmed.
1999 Rev. F 2-62
EC544: Jam at exit
Media jam near exit. Lift top K211. Media is jammed in laser L544 Jam to Exit ALM,17
cover and remove jam in area 5 imager 1. Check local panel.
P544
Summary
The media is jammed in the processing module going to the exit assembly. The exit sensor came on but
never went off.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-8 for a description of machine functions during film drive through the processor.
Clear jam.
Note: All images on the current sheet are erased from memory and will have to be refilmed.
Cause: Exit switch is sticking in roller. Groove is worn where the switch hits the roller.
Solution: Cut out the area that is worn off to widen the groove.
1999 Rev. F 2-63
EC549: Processor filter not present
Please insert filter. None. L549 FILTER_WAS_CHANGED None.
P549

Refer to Section 4-6 for sensor information.
1999 Rev. F 2-64
EC550: Clean processor and replace filter.
Preventive maintenance and cleaning None. L550 CHANGE_FILTER None.
recommended. Please schedule with service.
(See Operator’s Guide for details) P550
Summary
The filter count in SCB NVRAM has exceeded 10,000 prints.
Place a service call.
Perform PM procedure and replace filter. Refer to Service Manual PM procedure.
Note
Filter Promotion
For DryView 8700/8500 Laser Imagers during warranty, the filter can be provided at no charge if the
customer installs a dedicated phone line connected to the DryView 8700/8500, or purchases a
second year service agreement (PREMIUM or PRIORITY only).
For DryView 8700/8500s outside of warranty, filters are a charge item to the customer unless a
Premium or Priority Service Agreement is purchased. All filters will be replaced at no charge when a
PM is performed on equipment.
Filter Count
The filter count can be viewed and changed at the MPC/SCB/Config/Filter count screen. The filter count is
reset to 0 when both the PM screen is displayed and the filter switch is deactuated with the machine turned
on.
Problem: Preventative maintenance message is displayed even though a technician was out recently, did
a PM, and changed the filter.
Cause: The filter count does not get reset when you do a PM unless both of the following are true.
a. The filter count is >10,000
b. The filter switch is deactuated when the filter count is >10,000
Solution: If you do a PM before the filter count has reached 10,000, you must reset the count via
MPC/Setup/SCB/Config/Filter.
1999 Rev. F 2-65
EC551, 552, 553: Processor heater 1,2,3 failed
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X is not op- L551,552,553 ALM,17
P551,552,553 erational. PROCESSOR_
HEATER1,2,3FAIL
551 – zone 1, 552 zone 2,
553–zone3
Summary
The temperatures of one of the three heater zones is not within 70° F of the other two.
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-2, Processor (theory of operation), for a detailed description of the process.

1. Problem: EC 552 or EC 553. Slow warm up/drum heater fail
Cause: Heater fuse is blown. The current fuses are known to have about a 3 to 4 year life (or less)
before they fail due to age. A new style fuse is being designed.
Note: Some of the early DryView 8700/8500’s did not have the connection clip soldered to the fuse
leads. This created a poor connection with resultant premature failure of the fuses.
Solution: If the fuse opened due to age, replace all three fuses. Refer to the Service Manual
disassembly section. Solder connection clips to the fuse leads using a heat sink to keep the heat away
from the fuse.
2. Problem: EC 551/552/553. Rotating Processor Boards blowing.
Cause: Heat sink for transistor is not mounted correctly, causing the transistor to burn out.
Solution: Order a new RPB, and inspect the new board to ensure that the transistor is sandwiched
between the two heat sinks.
Tech Tip
The reported temperatures from the processor are logged and can be retrieved via MPC/Log/Printer
Log/Processor. Refer to Section 4-2-3-8, for information on reading the log.
1999 Rev. F 2-66
EC554: Processor over temp
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X L554 PROCESSOR_ OVER_TEMP ALM,17
Summary
If the temperature from any of the three heater zones is reported above 290° F, EC554 Processor Over
Temp is declared and the SCB turns off power to the heaters. The top cover must be lifted to clear this
error.
Sequence of Events
1. The RPB receives a status request from the SCB and calculates the heater temperatures by reading a
voltage based on drum thermistor resistance. The three thermistors (green, orange, and blue wire sets)
have resistances of about:
• 1090 ohms at room temperature
• 1460 ohms at operating temperature
2. If the voltage reading for any of the three heater zones indicates above 290° F, an error message is
generated.
Refer to Section 4-2 for information on drum temperature control.
Power cycle the DryView 8700/8500.
Measure the resistance of the thermistors.
Cause: Drum and RPB assy is bad.
Solution: Replace assy.
Tech Tip
The reported temperatures from the processor are logged and can be retrieved via MPC/Log/Printer
Log/Processor. Refer to Section 4-2-3-8, Processor (theory of operation), for information on reading the
log.
1999 Rev. F 2-67
EC561: Invalid densitometer data
Automatic image Automatic image L561 DENSITOMETER_ERROR None.
quality control quality control OFF.
malfunction. P561
Summary
The densitometer data is invalid.
Sequence of Events
When the leading edge of the film actuates the densitometer entrance sensor, the SCB turns on the
densitometer LED and takes a density reading before the film is in the densitometer aperture path. The
SCB uses this information to auto calibrate the densitometer before each sheet. If the values read are not
within a reasonable range (i.e., a gain of 1400 through 2000 and an offset greater than 0), the error
message is generated.
Adjust the densitometer. Refer to Section 3 of the service manual for adjustment procedure.
Refer to Section 4-4, Densitometer Trouble Analysis, for more information.
Theory
Refer to Section 4-4 for densitometer theory of operation.
1999 Rev. F 2-68
EC601: Invalid power monitor offset
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X L601 INVALID_POWER_ MONITOR_OFFSET ALM,60
Summary
A beam power monitor reading is taken with no laser beam hitting the BPM board. This value should be
13 ±3.
Note
The BPM reading is taken only at power up).
Error State: If the BPM offset is outside of 1 through 25 reading EC601 Invalid power monitor offset is
declared.
Refer to Section 4-3-3-1 or beam power monitor trouble analysis.
1999 Rev. F 2-69
EC602: Invalid power monitor range
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X is not L602 INVALID_ ALM,60
P602 operational. POWER_MONITOR_ RANGE
Summary
Sequence of Events
This value must be within 50 to 70 mw.
The SCB directs the Optics Module to fire a laser beam of specific intensity when the attenuator is in the
wide open position (non attenuating). (The attenuator is a rotating polarizing filter within the Optics
Module). The Beam Power Monitor board then reports the results of the intensity of the laser beam back to
the SCB, via the BPWR signal line.
Error State: If the Maximum Laser Power reading is outside of 50 to 70mw, EC602 is generated. The laser
must be power cycled to clear the error state.
1. Problem/Cause: Optics module bad.
Solution: Replace the optics module. Make the following checks first
• Check the Beam Power Monitor aperture for dust or debris in the chute.
• Reseat cables to Optics module, SCB and MIB.
• Check the Beam Power Monitor board for proper operation. Refer to Section 4-3-3-1.
• Check the optics offset according to the following procedure.
2. Problem/Cause: The optics offset is incorrect.
Solution: Perform the following procedure.
• If a print is available with a Dpatch on it, measure the distance from the top of the film to the leading
edge of the Dpatch. It should be 7 ±1mm. If it is greater than 3mm out of spec, the offset is a likely
cause of the EC602. (Check to be sure there is no physical mispositioning of the film in the optics
platen.)
• If the EC602 is intermittent, adjust the offset to spec.
• If the EC602 is hard down you will have to try the following.
a. At the MPC/Diagnostic/SCB/CMD window type “Set laser 3072” (this is about ¼ power)
b. “Set attenuator 480” (minimum attenuation).
c. “Show Power” (moves the X and Y galvos to scan across the BPM board and the SCB takes a
reading).
d. Multiply the result times .02 The product is approximately the Maximum Laser Power.
e. If the reading is at or under 50 MW, the optics offset may be out of adjustment.
Note
Put a piece of tape over the optics GAIN pot so you do NOT adjust it.
f. Turn the Optics offset pot 1/4 turn CCW (this will move the first scan line ~1 mm towards the
beam power monitor board, and decrease the dpatch to leading edge distance). Offset pot is
located on the front of the optics module.
1999 Rev. F 2-70
g. Repeat steps 3 and 4.

If the Max Laser Power has increased, move the pot in the same direction until the Max laser
power is within spec. (If the Max Laser Power has decreased, turn the pot in the other
direction.)
The DryView 8700/8500 should now be able to print, and you can adjust the offset.
h. Measure the Dpatch placement and adjust to spec. (7mm ±1mm).
If the optics offset is mis-

Optics Platen adjusted, the first scan
line misses the BPM aper-
ture.
Beam Power Monitor Board.
Optics Platen Access Door.

8700–246L
1999 Rev. F 2-71
EC603: Invalid optical density range
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X L603 INVALID_ OPT_DENSITY_RANGE ALM,60
Summary
If the Attenuator Dynamic range is outside of 80-120 EC603 (invalid Optical Density Range) is declared.
The machine must be power cycled to clear the error.
To view the attenuator dynamic range:
1. Go to the SCB command window, and type in “set lpprintf=84” (do not send yet).
2. Reset the SCB via reset sw 10f1.
3. As soon as the local panel displays data, hit the Send button in MPC. The local panel will display the
optics tests sequentially. “AOD Range = ......” will display. The valid range is .8 to 1.2 (80-120).
Note
Press and hold the local panel NEXT button to keep the data from autopaging to the other screens.
Cause: Bad optics module.

Solution: Replace the optics. Make the following checks first:
1. Check the Beam Power Monitor aperture for dust or debris in the chute.
2. Reseat the cables to the optics module, SCB and MIB.
1999 Rev. F 2-72
EC604: Invalid laser dynamic range
P604 is not operational. INVALID_LASER_DYN_RANGE
Summary
If the Laser Dynamic Range is outside of the 200 to 4000 range, EC604 (Invalid Laser Dynamic Range) is
declared. The machine must be power cycled to clear the error.
General Troubleshooting Tip: To view the laser dynamic range:
1. Go to the SCB command window, and type in “set lpprintf=84” (do not send yet).
2. Reset the SCB via reset sw 10f1. As soon as the local panel displays data, hit the Send button in MPC.
The local panel will display the optics tests sequentially. Look for “Laser Dynamic Range=...”.
Note
1. Cause: Optics module is bad.

a. Check the Beam Power Monitor aperture for dust or debris in the chute.
b. Reseat the cables to the optics module, SCB and MIB.
c. If the problem remains, replace the optics module.
2. Cause: The control cable between SCB and optics has a loose fitting connection at the firewall due to
the cable securing screws bottoming out before the cables are fully seated.
1999 Rev. F 2-73
EC605: Attenuator test failed
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X is not op- L605 ATTEN_TEST_FAIL ALM,60
P605 erational.
Summary
The optics module attenuator could not rotate to a position which gives proper output power.
Problem/Cause: Optics module is bad.
1. Check the Beam Power Monitor aperture for dust or debris in the chute.
2. Reseat the cables to the optics module, SCB and MIB.
3. If the problem remains, replace the optics module.
Refer to Section 4-3 Optics, for more information and diagnostic tools to troubleshoot the attenuator.
1999 Rev. F 2-74
EC620: No film model found
Printer malfunction. None. L620 NO_FILM_MODEL ALM,57
P620
Summary
The film model for the film in the cartridge could not be found in SCB NVRAM and the default film model
was not found in SCB NVRAM.
Refer to Section 4-1-1, for the procedure to reinitialize the SCB NVRAM.
1999 Rev. F 2-75
EC622: Corrupt film tables
Printer malfunction. K202: Laser imager X is not L622 CORRUPT_FILM_TABLES ALM,57
P622 operational.
Summary
The Transfer Function Tables (TFT’s) on the SCB have failed the power up checksum test.
Power Cycle The Machine.
Reinitialize the SCB NVRAM following the procedure in Section 4-1-1.
1999 Rev. F 2-76
EC623: Bad transfer function
Printer malfunction. None. L623 BAD_TRANSFER_FUNCTION ALM,57
P623
Summary
The TFT’s on the SCB have invalid data.
Reinitialize the SCB NVRAM by following the procedure in Section 4-1-1.
1999 Rev. F 2-77
EC624: Bad densitometer data
AIQC malfunction P624 AIQC off L624 Bad Densitometer Data None
Summary
EC624 Bad Densitometer Data Dmin of the film is greater than .3. (Note: this could be caused by film
that is past the expiration date, or has been stored at higher than spec
temperatures. It could also be caused by a developer temperature that is
too high.)
EC624 Bad Densitometer Data Each step of the calibration sheet is not as dark or darker than the pre-
vious step (i.e., density is NOT increasing monotonically). (Note: this
could be due to a fogged calibration sheet )
Sequence of Events
Refer to Section 4-5, AIQC Theory of Operation.
Try another cartridge. If this fixes the problem, the bad cartridge may be taken to a darkroom and the top
10 sheets removed if fogging is suspected as being the problem.
1. Problem: Fogged film.
Solution: Remove fogged film.
2. Problem: Dmin >.3
Cause: Film has been stored in out of spec temperatures, or is past expiration date, or dev temp is out
of spec.
Solution: Check developer temperatures. For more information on drum temperature control refer to
Section 4-2-3, Processor Theory of Operation.
1999 Rev. F 2-78
EC625: Bad film contrast
Automatic image quality Automatic image quality con- L625 BAD_FILM_CONTRAST None.
control is off. P625 trol OFF.
Summary
EC625 Film Contrast Bad Contrast of the calibrate sheet is unacceptable. (Densities of the steps in
relation to each other are out of spec.)
Sequence of Events
Cause: Fogged film
Solution: Try another cartridge of film.
Check the densitometer adjustment. Refer to Section 4-4 for more information on troubleshooting the
densitometer.
1999 Rev. F 2-79
EC631: Film slow
Automatic image quality control Automatic image quality control L631 FILM_SLOW None.
is off. P631 OFF.
Summary
EC631 Film Slow The darkest density of step 26 is not above 3.1 for blue film or 3.0 for
clear film.
Sequence of Events
Try a different cartridge of film or different lot.
Compare MPC/AIQC/DlogE densities to an external densitometer measuring the same calibrate
sheet. There may be some differences between the DryView 8700/8500 and external densitometer
readings (light source is a different wavelength), but the differences should remain proportional across
the steps. If the DryView 8700/8500 densitometer readings in MPC are invalid, check the densitometer.
Refer to Section 4-4-1, Densitometer Trouble Analysis.
Expose a film to room light, then load it as the top sheet in a cartridge and run a print.
– If 3.1 or 3.0 density cannot be achieved now, the processor temperature may be low or high.
– If the processor temperature checks ok, the film is probably bad.
– If processor temperatures are incorrect, adjust them using MPC. Refer to the service manual
adjustment. For additional information on processor temperatures, refer to Section 4-2-3, Processor
Theory of Operation.
Theory
For more information on AIQC, refer to Section 4-5.
1999 Rev. F 2-80
DryView EC632: Film fast
Automatic image quality control is Automatic image quality L632 FILM_FAST None
off. P632 control OFF.
Summary
EC632 Film Fast The film speed from the calibrate sheet is above 3.4. (Film Speed can be
viewed in MPC/AIQC/Dloge.)
Sequence of Events
Try a different cartridge. If this does not fix the problem, try a different lot of film.
Note
Set the density and contrast settings to optimize the image until a technician can arrive. When AIQC
is turned off, there is a DENSITY setting displayed on the local panel and at the HQ keypads. (The
DENSITY setting is independent of the DMAX setting.)

1. Compare MPC/AIQC/DlogE densities to an external densitometer measuring the same calibrate sheet.
There may be some differences between DryView 8700/8500 and external densitometer readings (light
source is a different wavelength), but the differences should remain proportional across the steps. If the
DryView 8700/8500 densitometer readings in MPC are invalid, check the densitometer. Refer to
Section 4-4-1, Densitometer Trouble Analysis.
2. Check the processor temperatures.
• If processor temperatures are incorrect, adjust them using MPC. Refer to the service manual
adjustment. For additional information on processor temperatures refer to Section 4-2, Processor
• If the temperatures look OK, check the Beam Power Monitor board and ensure that no dust or
debris is blocking the beam. Refer to Section 4-3-3-1 for more information.
Theory
For more information on the AIQC, refer to Section 4-5.
1999 Rev. F 2-81
EC633: System near calibration limits (film almost fast)
System is operating near cal- None L633 FILM_ALMOST_FAST None.
ibration limits. P633
Summary
EC633 Film Almost Fast The film speed is between 3.3 and 3.4. This may be a normal condition
caused by film variability, but may also be caused by other factors.
Note: Film speed can be viewed in MPC/AIQC/DlogE.
Sequence of Events
Try another cartridge or another lot of film.
• If processor temperatures are incorrect adjust them using the MPC. Refer to the service manual
(theory of operation).
• If the temperatures look OK, check the Beam Power Monitor Board and ensure that no dust or
debris is blocking the beam. Refer to Section 4-3-3-1 for more information.
Theory
1999 Rev. F 2-82
EC634: System near calibration limits (film almost slow)
System is operating near None L634 FILM_ALMOST_SLOW None.
calibration limits. P634
Summary
EC634.01 Film Almost Slow The film speed is between 2.6 and 2.7. This may be a normal condition
caused by film variability, but may also be caused by other factors.
Note: film speed can be viewed in MPC/AIQC/DlogE.
Sequence of Events
Try another cartridge or another lot of film.
• If the processor temperatures are incorrect adjust them using MPC. Refer to the service manual
• If the temperatures look OK, check the Beam Power Monitor Board and ensure that no dust or
debris is locking the beam. Refer to Section 4-3-3-1 for more information.
Theory
1999 Rev. F 2-83
EC635: Dpatch slow
None. None. L635 MIDTONE_SLOW None.
Summary
EC635 Midtone slow The Dpatch density is outside of control limits.
Sequence of Events
1. The first Dpatch after a calibrate sheet is targeted to be 1.3. However, the actual density of the first
Dpatch after the calibrate sheet is read and its value becomes the target.
Example: First Dpatch after a cal sheet is 1.1, 1.1 now becomes the target Dpatch density.
2. The AIQC software controls Dpatch density by taking the last five Dpatch readings, throwing out the
high and low values, and averaging the remaining three. If the calculated Dpatch average is within .05
of the target Dpatch, no attenuator change is made. If the calculated Dpatch average is greater than
.05, the attenuator is moved to bring the Dpatch average closer to target.
Look in the MPC/Log/Printer Log/Dpatch and retrieve the Dpatch log. The readings should be consistent.
Note
Density test and contrast test Dpatches are not logged.
1. Cause: Some of the densitometers have a bent mounting bracket that causes the timing of the Dpatch
reading to be off.
Solution: Readjust the bracket to ~90 degrees.
2. Problem (8800 only) Actual Dpatches are not normal (1.0 to 1.4), but Printer Log/Dpatch shows very
low densities (.45 tp .70).
Cause: Dmax is set to 3.2.
Solution: Set to 3.1. Software update 4.2 will fix this problem.
3. Cause: Dpatch is not 7 ±1mm from the top edge of the film.
Solution: Check the registration of the film in the optics platen. If the film is being positioned correctly,
adjust the position of the Dpatch by adjusting the Optics Module offset. Refer to the optics offset
adjustment in the Service Manual.
Compare MPC/Log/Printer log/Dpatch recorded densities to an external densitometer measurement of
the Dpatch. There may be some differences between the DryView 8700/8500 and external
densitometer readings (light source is a different wavelength), but the differences should remain
proportional. If the DryView 8700/8500 Dpatch readings in the MPC are invalid, check the
densitometer. Refer to Section 4-4-1 to troubleshoot the densitometer.
Theory
1999 Rev. F 2-84
EC636: Dpatch fast
None. None. L635 MIDTONE_FAST None.
Summary
EC636 Midtone Fast The Dpatch density is outside of control limits.
Sequence of Events
1. The first Dpatch after a calibrate sheet is targeted to be 1.3. However, the actual density of the first
Dpatch after the calibrate sheet is read and its value becomes the target.
Example: First Dpatch after a cal sheet is 1.1. Thus 1.1 now becomes the target Dpatch density.
2. The AIQC software controls Dpatch density by taking the last five Dpatch readings, throwing out the
high and low values, and averaging the remaining three. If the calculated Dpatch average is within .05
of the target Dpatch, no attenuator change is made. If the calculated Dpatch average is greater than
.05, the attenuator is moved to bring the Dpatch average closer to target.
Look in the MPC/Log/Printer Log/Dpatch and retrieve the Dpatch log. The readings should be consistent.
Note
Density test and contrast test Dpatches are not logged.
1. Problem/Cause: Some of the densitometers have a bent mounting bracket that causes the timing of
the Dpatch reading to be off.
Solution: Readjust the bracket to about 90 degrees.
2. Problem (8800 only): Actual Dpatches are normal (1.0 to 1.4), but the Printer Log/Dpatch shows very
low densities (.45 to .70).
Cause: Dmax is set to 3.2.
Solution: Set Dmax to 3.1. Software update 4.2 will fix this problem.
3. Problem/Cause: Dpatch is not 7 ±1mm from the top edge of the film.
Solution: Check the registration of the film in the optics platen. If the film is being positioned correctly,
adjust the position of the Dpatch by adjusting the optics module offset. Refer to the optics offset
adjustment in the Service Manual.
Compare MPC/Log/Printer Log/Dpatch recorded densites to an external densitometer measurement of
Dpatch. There may be some differences between the DryView 8700/8500 and external densitometer
readings (light source is a different wavelength), but the differences should remain proportional. If the
DryView 8700/8500 Dpatch readings in MPC are invalid, check the densitometer. Refer to Section
4-4-1, Densitometer Trouble Analysis.
Theory
1999 Rev. F 2-85
EC910: Printer malfunction
Printer malfunction P910. The laser imager is not commu- alm,60

nicating.
Summary
EC910
Outline of EC910
If you are viewing the CD-ROM, use the following outline and hypertext links to move through this
QuickSheet.
EC910 Overview
DryView 8700/8500 System
IPB to SCB Communications Overview
Symptom 1: IPB is not communicating to SCB, keypads, or MPC
Symptom 2: IPB is communicating to keypads and MPC, but is not communicating to SCB
DryView 8800 System

DryView 8800 to DryView 8700/8500 Troubleshooting
DryView 8800 to DryView 8700/8500 Schematic
DryView 8800 Output Module Loopback test
SCB RX Data LED Troubleshooting
EC910 Overview
• If the SCB has not received a command from the IPB within the last 45 seconds, it declares EC910 on
the local panel.
Note
The IPB always requests data, and the SCB responds. The SCB never initiates communication.
• EC910 does not show up in the error log. The error log is an IPB function and since communication is
not working between the SCB and IPB, the IPB never receives the error.
1999 Rev. F 2-86
IPB to SCB Communications Overview

1. IPB transmits SA (status) request to SCB - S:0,P:0,TX:SA.
2. SCB RX data LED: This is normally lit when the lines from the IPB are in an idle state (no data). It
flashes off when data is received. However, it flashes so fast that is cannot be visually detected during
normal communication.
3. SCB TX Data LED: Normally off, this LED flashes on when transmitting data to the IPB.
4. IPB RX data LED (green). Normally off, this LED flashes ON when it receives data from the SCB.
DryView 8700 EC910 Schematic
IPB
SCB
Rx LED
Rx LED
RS422
serial
comm
Tx LED lines.
8700–241L
DryView 8700/8500 IPB Troubleshooting

1. Symptom: IPB cannot communicate with keypads, MPC or SCB.
Solution:
a. Press the reset button on the IPB. If this clears the problem, try to determine what preceded the IPB
lockup. If this does not fix the problem, continue with b.
b. Reconfigure the IPB to factory defaults by holding down RESET and CONFIG buttons. Then
release RESET while continuing to hold CONFIG for 15 seconds. (This resets IPB/SCB comm
parameters and MPC comm parameters. If this does not fix the problem, continue with c.
c. Perform the following steps:
1. Connect only the power cable and the SCB cable (CN1102 - 10 pin multi-colored cable). Then
remove all other cables and boards. Does EC910 go away?
2. Connect only the power cable and the MPC cable (CN1101 - upper left flat ribbon cable). Then
remove all other cables and boards. Can you connect to the MPC? (Be sure
MPC/Operations/Preferences is set to Com 1, 19200 baud.)
3. Connect only the power cable and the TDB (remove all other cables and boards). Do the
keypads communicate?
4. If only one component is locking up the IPB, troubleshoot that component.
d. If the IPB cannot communicate with the SCB, MPC, or keypads, after all of the above checks are
performed, check the power supply to the IPB. If the power looks okay, the IPB is bad.
Note
If the Xilinx Eprom (U99) on the IPB is bad it will cause the IPB to fail it’s self test with DS2 (red)
remaining lit after a reset. If you have an extra Xilinx chip, you can try this first, otherwise just replace
the IPB board.
1999 Rev. F 2-87
2. Symptom: IPB can communicate with MPC or keypads, but is not communicating with the SCB.
Solution: Reconfigure the IPB by holding the RESET and CONFIG buttons. Then release RESET
while continuing to hold down CONF for 15 seconds. This resets IPB/SCB parameters and MPC comm
parameters.
If this doesn’t correct the problem, proceed to the IPB loopback test.
IPB Loopback Test
Complete the following steps to run the IPB Loopback Test:
1. Disconnect the IPB/SCB comm cable from the SCB CN1208 (10-pin multi-colored cable directly below
the SCB power connector.)
2. Jumper pin 3 to 7 and pin 4 to 8
1 3 5 7 9
2 4 6 8 10
8700–242L
3. Reset the IPB. Then wait 15 seconds.

4. Start the MPC monitor of slot 0. If the IPB is transmitting and receiving correctly you will see the
following:
• If the loopback test passes, the IPB has tested okay for both transmit and receive ports, and the
cable is okay. The SCB is at fault. Replace the SCB.
• If the IPB loopback test fails through the cable, try the loopback test directly at the IPB connector,
bypassing the cable.
Note
To make the loopback test easier, connect the TDB adapter cable to the IPB and jumper the
connector as follows.
• If the test still fails, the IPB is bad. If the test now succeeds, the cable is bad.
S:0,P:0,TX:SA
S:0,P:0,RX:SA MPC Monitor of slot 0.
S:0,P:0,TX:SA
S:0,P;0,RX;SA The IPB is transmitting and
S;0,P;0,TX;SA receiving it’s own command
S;0,P;0,RX;SA while in loop back mode.
8700–242aL
IPB
5 4 3 2 1
TDB Debug Cable
9 8 7 6
8700–242bL
If you do not have a TDB debug cable, jumper pins 3 to 7, and pins 4 to 8.
If you have a TDB debug cable, jumper pins 2 to 4, and pins 7 to 9.
1999 Rev. F 2-88
DryView 8800 to DryView 8700/8500 Troubleshooting

• If the SCB has not received a command from the DryView 8800 within the last 45 seconds, it declares
EC910 on the local panel.
Note
The DryView 8800 always requests data, and the SCB responds. The SCB never initiates
communication.
• EC910 does not show up in the error log. The error log is an DryView 8800 function and since
communication is not working between the DryView 8700/8500 SCB and DryView 8800, the DryView
8800 never receives the error.
• Check or change the MPC/Output module/Comm 1 config and comm setups as follows:
a. First set the Config to DryView 8700/8500 printer and save it.
b. Then set the Comm parameters to default via the PRINTER button and save.
c. The laser must be power cycled for any changes to take effect.
Note
Communication parameters between DryView 8800 and DryView 8700/8500 are (19200, 7-e-1,EOM
None, Protocol Packet, Char pacing 0)
• If reconfiguring the Output Module does not fix the problem, proceed to the DryView 8800/8700/8500
schematic diagram on the next page.
DryView 8800 to DryView 8700/8500 Schematic
DryView 8800 to DryView 8700 EC910 Schematic
4. Rx LED DS10B1
8700 flashes on. 8800 System
Controller
5. Tx LED DS10B2 3. DPRI Rx LED 2. LFIB Tx LED
flashes on. flashes on. flashes on.
SCB Dual Local Output

Module 1. System
Printer Fiber
controller
Remote Interface
transmits
HIB Interface Board
SA (status)
(LFIB)
request to
SCB -
(DPRI) Tx Rx 1 every 2
seconds.
Rx
6. HIB Tx LED DS2 8. LFIB Rx LED Rx 0
flashes on. flashes on. 10. System
7. DPRI Tx LED 9. Rx 1 (green) controller
flashes on. flashes on. receives a
reply, MPC
shows
Flashlight beam Flashlight beam received
does not change does change LED data.
LED state. state.
8700–243L
1999 Rev. F 2-89
• Use the LED’s to determine where the communication is failing.

• Use the DryView 8800 loopback test to verify data integrity from the output module.
• 969 to DryView 8700/8500 swapout: The DPRI in the DryView 8700/8500 and the DPEIB in the 969
have interchangeable boards.
DryView 8800 Output Module Loopback test
• MPC loopback test on DryView 8800 output module. MPC/DIAG/IMS/Output 0 Comm 1 (or Output 1,
Comm 1). Install the 969 OM loopback plugs.
- 37 pin loopback, part # 78-8077-4211-5 and
- 9 pin loopback, part # 78-8075-2585-8
• Loopback test using MPC monitor
- MPC/Operations/Monitor/Slot 0 (or 1 if DryView 8800 has two OM’s)
- 37 pin loopback
- without a loopback plug, monitor should show:
Normal S:0,P:0,TX:SA
S:0,P:0,RX:Y MS=53...etc...
Loopback
Installed S:0,P:0,TX:SA
S:0,P:0,RX:SA
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
SCB RX Data LED Troubleshooting
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
SCB TX +3.4v IPB
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
(Pin 7).
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DS10J1
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
glows. TX 0v
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
(Pin 8).
8700–244L
Is the SCB receiving data from the IPB?
This is not an easy question to answer for the following reason. As the IPB sends data, the transmit lines
will toggle polarity, in theory this causes the DS10J1 to turn off momentarily. The occurs so fast that the off
condition of DS10J1 cannot be detected visually.
Complete the following steps to determine if the SCB is receiving data from the IPB:
1. Using MPC, set the baud rate to 2400 (MPC/Setup/Output module Comm 0)
2. Reset the IPB by pressing the reset button. On power up, the IPB tries to communicate with the SCB at
2400 baud. This is an invalid baud rate and the SCB cannot decipher the IPB data at this baud rate.
However it will cause the DS10J1 LED to flash off when the data is received from the IPB.
If the SCB is receiving data, the DS10J1 flashes every 10 seconds (a series of 9 flashes followed by 10
seconds with the LED on).
3. Set the parameters back to default and reset the IPB. MPC/Setup/Output Module Comm 0/Comm)
To determine if the IPB is sending valid data, refer to IPB Loopback Test in this QuickSheet.
1999 Rev. F 3-1

3-1. General System Process Problems
3-1-1. SCB Power Up/Not Ready
Problem Description Cause Problem Isolation Procedure

Local panel displays 2 minutes Optics not up to temperature. Refer to sheet EC123.
for warm-up, but it is taking
longer.
SCB local panel and SCB One of the interlock feedback Refer to 4-6-5.
segment display are blank even circuits to the SCB is bad.
though there is power to the SCB
(+5v, ±17V LED’s lit on the SCB.
SCB local panel and SCB Blown fuse on the MIB. Check fuses on MIB.
segment display is blank, and
one of the SCB power indicator
LED’s is blank.
MIB board blew (smoked). A driver on the MIB shorted. Look up error in error log and
Refer to Figure 4-3 for shorted refer to ECQS.
driver location.
Objectionable odor from Filter needs changing. Change filter.
machine.
Objectionable odor from film. Poor ventilation in viewing room. Increase site ventilation. If
DryView film stored in vinyl possible, store film in paper
jackets. jacket.
The DryView 8700/8500 worked Power module fan being stopped Repair loose grommet material.
for about 45 minutes and then due to edging grommet material
died. It would start up later and contacting the fan blade.
run for a period then die again.
3-1-2. Image Acquisition

Acquire light won’t stop flashing. The user is in color blind mode. From the main keypad menu
select KEYPAD MENU, COLOR
BLIND MODE OFF
For all other acquire problems, refer to one of the following sheets: 39, 59, 64, 66, 67, 68
1999 Rev. F 3-2
3-1-3. Film Transport
Problem Description Area Problem Isolation Procedure

Cartridge will not insert fully, or Refer to EC132.
Insert Cartridge displayed even
though the cartridge is installed.
Cartridge will not open. Refer to EC176.
Cartridge will not close. Refer to EC177.
Film will not pickup, or jams at Area 1 Refer to EC166, EC161.
cartridge area.
Jam in transport. Area 2a. Refer to EC163.
Jam in transport. Area 2b. Refer to EC165.
Jam in the exposure platen. Area 3. Refer to EC164.
Jam in the processor (or at Area 4. Refer to EC542.
entrance to processor).
Jam in densitometer. Area 4. Refer to EC543.
Jam at exit. Area 5. Refer to EC544.
1999 Rev. F 3-3
3-1-4. Print Queue

Image queues but fails to print
Prints wrong number of copies
Prints to wrong printer
etc.

Images acquire, but fail to print 1. Wrong destination set by user. 1. Set destination at the remote
(DryView 8800). or local keypad or using
IMS/Input/System/Destination.
2. Wrong printer type in MPC. 2. Set printer type using
EC910 will display on local panel. MPC/IMS/Output/Config (and
Comm).
3. Unprintable character in the 3. Make sure that only the letters
MPC/IMS/System/User ID field A-Z and numbers 1-9 are in the
field.
Images acquire, but fail to print. DZO from host is failing. Monitor Set MPC/Setup/IMS/Host/Pixel
communications using MPC to Correction to No. Refer to 5-5,
determine if this is the case. Image Processing, for more
Refer to 5-3, TDB information on failed DZO.
Communication.
Siemens with SHPT keypad. First Set SHPT keypad to
copy prints, but second copy AUTOFORMAT OFF.
fails.
Partially imaged page. Refer to 3-4, Image Quality
Trouble Analysis.
Contrast test does not print. Image size it too large. DryView 8700/8500 cannot print
a contrast test when the image
lines are greater than 1024. Go
to MPC/Image/Show to view
image size from host.
Contrast test from a host user Time from acquire pass to the Open the supply cartridge and
prints the DryView 8700/8500 image being erased is shorter have the host acquire and print
internal SMPTE pattern. than the time it takes to generate an image. Initiate a contrast test
a contrast test. and wait 2 minutes. Close the
cartridge. Both the users should
print and the contrast test should
exit.
Films printing to wrong printer in When an HQ keypad is reset, it Next release of the software will
a dual printer system. will automatically switch printer set this default to off. A service
destinations if the currently technician must enable this
selected printer is not on within feature. Currently, this feature is
30 seconds of the keypad reset. always enabled.
1999 Rev. F 3-4
3-1-5. Processor

Squeaking 1. Drum idler rollers. Lubricate the drum idler rollers,
2. Stripper idler rollers. stripper rollers, and exit idler
rollers with Krytox lubrilcant.
3. Exit idler rollers.
Black buildup on the drum idler Idler rollers are not turning. Lubricate with Krytox oil.
rollers.
Black buildup on the drum rollers. Stripper is too close to the drum. Adjust the stripper gap. Refer to
and drum surface is forming into Aluminum from stripper is getting the DryView 8700/8500 Service
a black powder and migrating to onto drum and rollers and Manual.
the film and elsewhere. Initial creating a sandpaper effect.
symptoms are a white haze on Idler rollers may need lubrication. Lubricate with Krytox.
the drum.
3-1-6. AIQC

Dpatch log is showing incorrect Refer to EC635 Dpatch slow or
values. EC636 Dpatch fast.
DlogE curve has a spike in it. Calibrate sheet was misread due Customer should run another
Curve is not smooth. Customers to a software bug. This problem calibrate sheet. Update 4.2 will
images also have bad contrast. usually occurs first thing in the correct this problem.
morning or on Monday morning
after a weekend with no use.
For all other AIQC problems, refer to any of the following heets: 624, 631, 632, 633, 634, 635, 636.
1999 Rev. F 3-5
3-2. Host/Keypad Communications Trouble Analysis

Determine if you have a communications problem:
If the MPC error log shows an acquired error 59-68, you have an acquire problem. Go back to the Error
Code table of contents.
If the acquires work okay, but the DZO command from the host fails, you have a Define Zone problem.
– Go to Section 5-3-4-2 for 959 Command Set information.
– Go to Section 5-5-5-5 for DZO example with pixel correction.
3-2-1. TDB Troubleshooting

TDB troubleshooting flow is as follows:
1. Is the DS5 lit (red)? If yes, go to flowchart Figure 3-1.
2. Is the DS5 flashing at 1 second intervals? If yes, go to flowchart Figure 3-2.
3. Does the TDB Rx LED not flash on when data is sent from the host/keypad fiber cable or copper cable?
If this is a fiber cable, go to flowchart Figure 3-3.
4. If this is a copper cable, go to flowchart Figure 3-4.
5. IPB - MPC/Monitor: Is the TDB Rx LED flashing, but MPC or monitor does not show data received? Go
to flowchart Figure 3-5.
6. MPC/Monitor shows “Unknown Command” or “Invalid Command”. Go to flowchart Figure 3-6.
7. Is the TDB transmitting data? MPC/Monitor shows valid data being received and transmitted, but host,
keypad or UKEIB does not show any data being received. Go to flowchart Figure 3-7.
IPB - MPC Monitor

TDB Rx LED does not flash on when data
5. TDB Rx LED flashes, is sent from host/keypad.
but MPC/Monitor does not 3. Fiber cable
show data received.
4. Copper cable
UKEIB Host or KP
Rx LED
6. MPC/Monitor shows TDB 1 RCV Sta
Port 0
“Unknown Command” or
“Invalid Command.” Rx LED Sta,
XMIT
CPU Port 1 1,
0 Rdy
DS5
2. DS5 flashing
~1 sec. intervals.
7. Is TDB transmitting data?
MPC/Monitor shows valid data being received and
transmitted, but host, keypad, or UKEIB does not
show any data being received.
1. DS5 lit (red).
8700–231L
Figure 3-1. TDB Troubleshooting Flowchart
1999 Rev. F 3-6
IPB is holding reset line low to TDB. If DS5

stays on constantly, the IPB is holding the
DS5 lit Yes RESET line low to the TDB. This prevents Reseat/Replace
1.
(red). the TDB from starting its self test. The IPB IPB or TDB.
will hold the line low until the IPB finishes it’s
self test.
No
TDB cannot pass its boot up. When the IPB Check/replace
releases the TDB, the TDB does a self-test. TDB Eproms.
DS5 If it succeeds, DS5 goes out. If the TDB OK now?
Yes
2. flashing ~1 sec. does not successfully complete its self-test, it
intervals. will reset itself and try again. DS5 will flash No
on and off.
No
Replace TDB.
Fiber
TDB Rx Cable No Host is
3. UKEIB RCV LED UKEIB switches set Yes
LED does not not sending
flash on? correctly?
flash on. data.
Yes
For your information
Try another fiber

optic cable. Try RS232.
OK now? Breakout Box to see
if host is sending to
No UKEIB.
3a. Proceed to 4. Refer to
Fiber TDB. Copper TDB.
Try RS422.
LoopBack test
3-2-6.
3. Rx data DS1 2. RCV LED 1. Host or Keypad
flashes on. flashes on. sends data.
IPB
TDB UKEIB 969 Keypad
RCV
STA
Sta,
XMIT 1,
Rdy
4. XMIT LED 5. Host or Keypad

flashes on. shows received data.
8700–232L
1999 Rev. F 3-7
Is
TDB Rx LED
on with fiber No Replace TDB.
3a
disconnected?
Yes
Flashlight test.
(Is the TDB Optical Receiver working?)
No
With the fiber cables disconnected, pass a flashlight beam
across the TDB Rx port (A).
Does DS1 turn off?
Yes
Is UKEIB
transmitting light out No
its Tx port (“A”) with Replace UKEIB.
host or keypad
disconnected?
Yes
Host is not sending

Is
valid idle signal.
UKEIB
RS232 - connect
transmitting light No Breakout Box in
out port “A” with
line. Data line from
host or keypad
host should be low.
connected?
RS422 - If the
transmit lines from
the host are
Yes reversed, TDB DS1
will be on when idle
Perform any of the following options: and flash off when
- Breakout Box - RS232. Use in line with host to see if line data is being
changes state. transmitted.
- Loopback Test - TDB and/or UKEIB. Refer to 3-3-6.
- Use PC to send commands to TDB. Refer to TDB Theory of
Operation. Refer to 5-3-1.
8700–233L

1999 Rev. F 3-8
Is the Fiber Converter

working properly?
Is Rx
Are jumpers Copper with FO Converter LED on with
set correctly? Yes Fiber Optic Converter No
4. connected and fiber cable
RS232 or RS422?
disconnected?
Yes Yes
Copper only Flashlight test:

Check:
With the fiber cables
- Slide switch to left
disconnected, pass a flashlight
Yes - +5v fuse OK on TDB
beam across converter Rx port
Does Rx LED light now?
(A). Does Rx LED change states?
No No
Is the TDB functioning correctly?
Is UKEIB
transmitting light out
No Replace
its Tx port (A) with +5v across pins 5 No
UKEIB. Replace
host or keypad and 9 of comm.
disconnected? port? TDB.
Yes
Yes
Yes Jumper pin 2 to 8, No
Replace
and pin 3 to 7. Rx
Converter
LED on now?
Is UKEIB Host is not sending valid idle signal. RS232

transmitting light - Connect Breakout Box in line. Data line
No
out its Tx port (A) from host should be low. RS422 - If the
with host or keypad transmit lines from the host are reversed,
connected? DS1 will be on when idle and flash off when
data is being transmitted.
Yes
Perform any of the following options:

- Breakout Box - RS232. Use in line with host to see if line changes state.
- Loopback Test - TDB and/or UKEIB. Refer to 3-2-6.
- Use PC to send commands to TDB. Refer to TDB theory of operation 5-3-1.
8700–234L
1999 Rev. F 3-9
6. MPC/Monitor shows Data has reached the IPB, but the format or content
“Unknown Command” or of the data is different than expected.
“Invalid Command.”
Set up comm parameters for
user to correct defaults.
- Cmd set (959 or 969)
- Word format (Ex. 7-e-1)
OK now?
No
Host is sending invalid

commands. Try using
your PC to send
commands to the TDB.
Refer to TDB Theory of
Operation 5-3-1.
8700–235L
5. TDB Rx LED flashes, but EITHER:

MPC/Monitor does not a. The TDB has rejected or ignored the data from the host because the
show data received from format or content of the data is different than expected.
host. b. The TDB is locked up.
BEWARE: At install only:

“Idle chatter” is not Via MPC/setup/IMS/Comm set parameters to match the host:
communication from the - Ex. 1200, 8-e-1, ACK/Nack, etc . . .
host.
Reset the TDB by any of Use the TDB

the following options: Debug port to view
- Attempt an acquire communications.
using MPC, then select
the IMS button. (This will No Refer to
reset the TDB without TDB Theory of
losing any images.) Operation 5-3-1.
- Reset button on IPB.
- Power cycle 8700.
OK now?
8700–350L

1999 Rev. F 3-10
7. MPC/Monitor Fiber with UKEIB

shows valid data
being received
and transmitted,
but host or Is the
keypad does not TDB transmitting
Fiber Is the UKEIB Tx No data? Does No
show any data
being received. LED flashing on? Channel B emit light
when Tx data is
occurring?
BEWARE:
“Idle chatter” is
Yes Replace TDB.
not
Yes
communication
from the host.
Are the Yes

Copper UKEIB switches
Install set correctly?
Breakout Box in line Yes
with host. Does Tx
LED (pin 2) flash?
Replace fiber
No cable or UKEIB.
Host may be
locked up.
- Reset host by opening and then closing

supply door.
TDB jumpers set - ARS (alarm reset) will be sent to the
correctly? host (if MPC/Host/Alarm is set to old).
- If this does not fix the problem, power
cycle the host system.
Yes OK now?
No
Replace TDB.
Use Data Tap to view communication

from TDB. Refer to TDB Theory of
Operation 5-3-1.
8700–236L
1999 Rev. F 3-11
3-2-2. Host Specific Troubleshooting Tips (GE, Siemens, etc.)

A few general troubleshooting tips are as follows:
Try a different keypad or different port
Read the help screens in MPC/IMS/Host for information on the different 952/959 command set host
parameters.
Refer to the Technical Reference Manual (TRM) for information on specific modality (COMM and Host)
parameter settings.
Refer to the TDB Theory of Operation to understand how the TDB operates. Refer to Section 5-3.
Contact your local PST member for complete command set information.
Leave a PC on site to capture an intermittent problem. Refer to TDB Theory of Operation for setup
information.
Once the MPC monitor is started, a different PC can be connected and a communications software
package like Crosstalk or Procomm can capture the data. To do this complete the following steps:
1. Start the MPC/ monitor.
2. Disconnect the 9 pin serial cable from your PC.
3. Stop monitoring and close MPC.
4. Hook up the MPC cable to port 1 of an old PC and start up your communications software to
capture information from port 1. Set MPC defaults to 19200 and 7-0-1.
When capturing data and looking through error logs, search for the following keywords: Err, Bad, Alm,
Inv, Fai, Unk, û, Nak (Nak means not acknowledged due to parity error).
GE Host Troubleshooting Tips
All GE host controls should be set to alarm mode old (See TB 969-15-6/95)
DryView 8700/8500 V1.14 only (V1.15 fixes this problem) – Set MPC/Setup/HOST/P3 to 8 seconds. This
corrects a problem that shows up in the communications log as the DryView 8700/8500 sending three
STC commands followed by GE sending three STP commands, followed by an INV response from the
DryView 8700/8500.
If the GE system has Comm problems, GE technicians need to Release and then Reserve the camera
at the GE console.
1999 Rev. F 3-12
Siemens Host Troubleshooting Tips
Camera Time-out: If the Siemens console does not receive a response when it sends a command, the
Siemens console will wait a given period of time and then display Camera Time-out.
Camera Error: If there is a response from the DryView 8700/8500, but the response is an error condition,
the Siemens console will display a Camera Error message or Unknown Command.
The error mode (SHCI, SHPT, or STDB) in MPC/IMS/Comm/Siemens must match the Siemens camera
setup screen (SHPT mode or SHCI mode). Refer to the Technical Reference Manual for modality specific
information.
“Warning as error” in MPC/Comm/Siemens should be set to NO unless the TRF (Technical Reference
Manual) states otherwise.
Siemens with SHPT keypad. First copy prints, but second copy fails. Set SHPT keypad to
AUTOFORMAT OFF.
Try any of the following solutions to correct a lockup between the Siemens system and the Laser
Imager.
1. Open the supply drawer.

2. If the Siemens console does not show “supply door open”, reset the SHPT (if an DryView 8800
system or reset DryView 8700/8500 if an DryView 8700/8500 stand-alone.
3. Close the supply drawer. The TDB will send W41. In a little while, the Siemens console should
display: Supply drawer open. Close the supply drawer. The TDB will send G41. In a minute, the
Siemens console would display Camera Alarm Eliminated.
4. Have the Siemens technician press Continue on the Siemens console.
Go into MPC monitor mode. If there is no IDLE Chatter every 15 seconds the TDB is locked up and can
be reset by completing the following steps:
1. Attempting an acquire through MPC. Wait for it to fail or succeed.
2. Exit the EIB menus by selecting the IMS button.
3. The TDB will do a reset at this point, but all images in IPB memory will remain.
4. Have the Siemens’ technician press Continue on their console.
If all of the above solutions fail, have the user power-cycle the DryView 8700/8500. If communications still
fail, have the user power-cycle the Siemens system.
1999 Rev. F 3-13
3-2-3. DryView 8700/8500 Keypad

Keypad is dead. TDB is not supplying +12V to the Set SW2 to right most position to
DryView 8700/8500 keypad. supply +12V to DryView
8700/8500 keypad.
Check and/or replace the +12V
fuse on the TDB.
3-2-4. HQ Keypad

The POSITIVE/NEGATIVE can Power cycle the UKEIB to get it
get lost from the box in the menu back where it belongs. V1.15
screen it normally belongs in and fixes this bug.
overlays all the other screens
except the right one.
Acquire light won’t stop flashing. The user is in color blind mode. From the main keypad menu,
select KEYPAD MENU...COLOR
BLIND MODE OFF.
Keypad and touch screen don’t One of the mechanical switches Press the key to free it up.
respond. is stuck down.
Need to access the keypad Press the PRINT, ERASE, and
service screen. the SEQUENTIAL ACQUIRE
(large bottom key) keys
simultaneously.
Keypad says Not This is normal if you are in the Select the IMS button. The TDB
communicating with laser while EIB screen and have attempted will reset and about ten seconds
you are connected with MPC. an acquire or attempted the later the keypad should
Gain/black level procedure. communicate.
3-2-5. DryView 8800 Local Panel

Parameter settings on the The SET button must be pressed
DryView 8800 local panel do not after making changes to the
take effect. parameter settings. Also, the
correct USER must be selected.
The DryView 8800 local panel The service switch inside the Throw the switch to the LOCAL
does not respond. front panel set to MPC. Keypad position.
Films printing to wrong printer in When an HQ keypad is reset, it Educate the customer on this
a dual printer system. will automatically switch printer feature. Note: V1.15 of the
destinations if the currently software will default this feature
selected printer is not on within to off. A service technician must
30 seconds of the keypad reset. enable this feature. Prior to
V1.15, this feature is always
enabled. Refer to 4-2.
1999 Rev. F 3-14
3-2-6. Communications Loopback Test – Host Mode: TDB Copper or TDB Fiber
with UKEIB
Complete the following steps to troubleshoot a TDB copper or TDB fiber with UKEIB:
1. Set the MPC/IMS/IM/Comm to 959 defaults if not already setup. If parameters are changed, the
DryView 8700/8500 must be power cycled.
2. Set the MPC/IMS/Host to alarm mode old. (Set it back to the original setting when you are done.)
3. Install input module loopback plug, RS422, (78-8075-2585-8) or jumper pin 4 to 6, and pin 7 to 8.
4. Install RS232 loopback plug, or jumper pin 2 to pin 3.
5. Open the top cover.
6. If the communications system is working properly, you will see the following series of commands
scrolling down the screen.
S:1,P:0,TX:ALM,16
S:1,P:0,RX:INV,INV,INV,INV,INV,INV,INV,INV,INV,INV,INV,INV,INVALM,16
If the loopback test works as shown above, but the host communications still shows no received data,
the host is at fault.
Set Alarm Mode back to the correct setting for the host.
Note
Why all the INVs? What is happening in the previous example is that the IPB has sent ALM,16 to the
host and because of the loopback jumpers has received back ALM,16. The IPB sends a message
back to the host INV,ALM,16 (invalid command ALM,16. The IPB was expecting some other response
to it’s ALM, 16 message). We loop this back and the DryView 8700/8500 receives INV,ALM16. To
which the DryView 8700/8500 replies INV,INV, ALM,16 and so on.
3-2-7. Communications Loopback Test - Siemens Mode

Complete the following steps to troubleshoot a TDB copper or TDB fiber with UKEIB:
1. Set MPC to Siemens defaults if not already done.
2. Quit MPC.
3. Setup for TDB Debug mode. Parameters are: TDB J3 19200,8n1. Refer to the TDB Theory of
Operation, Section 5-3, for more information.
4. Install RS232 input module loopback plug or jumper pin 2 to pin 3. Install RS422 Loopback Plug.
5. Power cycle the machine.
6. After the TDB passes the self test, the debug port will say DEBUG MENU AVAILABLE. Press Return
and select from the menus.
7. Wait about 1 minute until the FMT and BOX commands have stopped scrolling across the screen.
8. Open the top cover and wait about 1 minute. If the loopback test is working properly, you should see
the following :
USP(1) <<W41
USP(1)>>w41 (command received by TDB from the loopback procedure)
1999 Rev. F 3-15
9. Close the top cover and wait about one minute. You should see the following:
USP (1)<<G41
USP (1)>>G41
<< means the command was sent from the TDB
>> means the command was received by the TDB because of the loopback test.
If the loopback test works as described, the communications system is okay from the loopback to the
TDB. Reconnect to Siemans and try the cover open and close test. If the Siemens does not show a
Cover Open or Camera Alarm eliminated, when the top cover is open (wait 1 minute), then close the
cover, the problem is between the loopback point and Siemens.
1999 Rev. F 3-16
3-2-8. Copper TDB Schematic
RS422 LED - Red

DS4 - Lit when RS422 lines
are receiving a valid idle
KEY
Jumper state from host, UKEIB, or
Rx data = solid line select fiber converter. When data
Tx data = dashed line Rx LED Green RS232 is sent they will flash off.
DS1 flashes on or
when data is RS422
IPB received.
TDB-Copper
Port 1
RS422/
CPU Ttl Host
Converter
RS232
to Ttl
Converter
TX
TX
Converters
TX
Converters
RESET Line Converters
RS232/
Ttl
Converter Port 0
RS422
Host
to Ttl
Converter
TDB Reset LED Rx LED Green RS422 LED - Red

DS5 on during reset. DS2 flashes on DS3 - Lit when RS422 lines
Off when reset when data is are receiving a valid idle
completes. received. state from host, UKEIB, or
fiber converter. When data
is sent they will flash off.
8700–237L
Figure 3-8. Copper TDB Schematic

1999 Rev. F 3-17
3-2-9. Fiber TDB Schematic
3. Rx data DS1 2. RCV LED 1. Host or Keypad

flashes on. flashes on. sends data.
IPB
TDB UKEIB
RCV STA
Sta,
XMIT 1,
Rdy
4. TDB TX port 5. XMIT LED 6. Host or

(B) flashes on. flashes on. Keypad shows
received data.
8700–238L
Figure 3-9. Fiber TDB Schematic
3-2-10. TDB Idle Chatter

The following sequence (idle chatter) between the TDB and IPB (and the TDB to DryView 8700/8500
keypad) occurs approximately every 15 seconds if either comm port is set to DryView 8700/8500 or
Siemens protocol.
Idle chatter is communication between the TDB and the IPB, not the host.
S:1,P:0,RX:Sta Pr=1
S:1,P:0TX:Sta Y LT5 Media=BWDryB,E14x17 Media low Busy
S:1,P:0,TX:Sta Pr=1
S:1,P:0TX:Sta Y LT5 Media=BWDryB,E14x17 Media low Busy
1999 Rev. F 3-18
3-3. MPC Trouble Analysis

Cannot connect with the MPC 1. DryView 8800 – Set the service 1. Try Setting
switch to the MPC position. MPC baud MPC/Operations/Preferences Direct
rate and DryView 8700/8500 or connect to other baud rates.
DryView 8800 baud rate do not match.
2. IPB MPC port is locked up. 2. Power cycle the DryView 8700/8500
or DryView 8800.
3. IPB to MPC communication 3. Reconfigure the IPB. To do this, press
parameters are invalid. and hold RESET and CONFIG. Then
release RESET and hold CONFIG until
the TDB red LED goes out. This
reconfigures the MPC Comm
parameters and the IPB to SCB comm
parameters to defaults.
Gain/Black Level Adjustment
1. Video Gain/Black Level 1. The A drive was last used, and the re- 1. Reselect the C: drive using MPC.
RETRIEVE image procedure trieved image is being sent to it by MPC.
takes longer than normal; one
to two minutes for a 512 x 512
image.
2. Video Gain/Black level 2. Toshiba notebooks can operate unreli- 2. Reset the notebook and the laser to
retrieval procedure errors out ably at 19200 baud. 2400 baud and try the procedure again.
or does not complete. Note: The laser must be power cycled
after a change in baud rate.
3. The Gain/Black level 3. Images are in memory for the user. 3. Delete the images in memory using
numbers (0 and 512) do not MPC/Image/Delete. Delete only the user
change or do not appear to be images with the problems.
working correctly.
Everytime you cycle power on Select
the DryView 8700/8500 you MPC/Operations/Diagnostics/SCB/CMD
must wait 3 minutes for the . Send the following command to the
temperature to stablilize SCB: TEST HIB 9
before you can run films This sets the processor warming time to
again. 0, making the processor think it is
Problem: Printer resets when warmed up. However, if the optics is still
the DlogE curve is retrieved. not warmed up, the imager will wait up
Cause: Software bug in SCB to 15 minutes.
code.
Solution: Fixed in 1.15 SCB
software.
DryView 8800 Tip: MPC monitor program continues to display on your PC even when the service switch is set to
local keypad.
1999 Rev. F 3-19
3-4. Image Quality Trouble Analysis
3-4-1. General Image Quality Troubleshooting Tips

Lower the Dmax to minimum from the local panel or keypad. This will make some image quality
problems more obvious.
Make the following checks to see if the problem is confined to one user.
– density test is okay, but the user image is not
– problem affects only one user
– image area only and not the border
– if only one user is having problems, troubleshoot the interfaces and check the MPC parameters
for that user.
Does a calibrate sheet look okay? If the calibrate sheet looks okay, refer to 4-5-4 AIQC for a
diagram of the calibrate image path.
3-4-2. Banding or Streaks, Horizontal

A well defined clear line through Optics module YGalvo has skipped a Replace optics module.
image and border. Placement is line.
random on the film.
Horizontal banding. Vibration is the cause. Vibration Try the following solutions:
sources can result from customers 1. Make sure the optics platen is free
bumping the DryView 8700/8500 floating and centered within the
while a film is imaging or guide holes.
construction work being done in an
adjacent room. 2. Check that the cabling to the
optics is not putting stress on the
optics platen assembly, or is not
resting against the external cabinet.
3. Make sure that the optics shipping
screws are removed.
Horizontal banding on density test Pickup arm is allowed to move Contact service engineering.
and user images. Shows up on a during scanning. This motion is
density test about two inches above causing the banding.
the 50% squares in the flat grey field
area.
Venetian blind effect. Horizontal lines Customer is unfreezing the image
in the images. before the laser has finished
acquiring the image or is acquiring
before the image is frozen.
Also, the first acquire of the day
takes a little longer than succeeding
acquires, and the customer may not
be waiting long enough in this
situation.
Horizontal streak always in the same Coating Streak. Replace film.
location on the film.
1999 Rev. F 3-20
Coating
streak.
C 14 x 17
O film.
WEB from
A
manufacturing
T
E
R
8700–239L
Figure 3-10. Horizontal Banding or Streaks
3-4-3. Banding or Streaking, Vertical
Problem Description Problem Isolation Procedure

Dust on the optics mirror. Do not clean or touch mirror. Vacuum platen area being careful not to blow dust
around. Then blow dust off the mirror using a bellows or compressed air. (The
mirror can be seen from the inside the optics platen.
Scratches. Refer to Scratches in this document.
Damaged drum. Replace drum.
3-4-4. Contrast or Density of Image is Unacceptable to User
Problem Cause Problem Isolation Procedure

Description
Contrast or density of 1. The border density is 1. Change the TFT using MPC/IMS/Image/TFT or
image is affecting how the user (DryView 8800) EPROM update. Refer to the help screen
unacceptable to user. in MPC for more information on which TFT to select. A
power cycle must be done for TFT changes to take effect.
Try both settings in the MPC/IMS/Image/Match Border.
2. Viewboxes are bad. 2. Try a different viewbox.
3. The VEIB is misadjusted. 3. Run a contrast test. When the VIEB is adjusted
correctly, a SMPTE pattern should display the 95% and
5% patches equally visible on the low to mid range
contrast selections. Some of the highest selections may
not show the patches. Refer to the Service Manual
installation procedure for VEIBS.
4. The AIQC system is not 4. Check the error log for AIQC errors.
working correctly. – Measure the densities of the calibrate sheet steps
using the densitometer and compare them with the
calibrate sheet densities displayed in MPC/AIQC
Dloge. There may be some differences between
DryView 8700/8500 and external densitometer
readings (light source is a different wavelength).
but the differences should remain proportional
across the steps.
1999 Rev. F 3-21
Problem Cause Problem Isolation Procedure

Description
– Dpatch readings. Retrieve the last 500 Dpatch
readings in MPC/Log/Printer Log/Dpatch. The
Dpatch densities should be uniform.
– If the MPC values appear incorrect, refer to
EC631–636 for more information on AIQC errors.
5. Changes made at the local 5. Be aware of who is controlling the density and contrast.
panel or local keypad are not Also, be aware that the users Dmax and Contrast settings
taking effect because the host printed on the contrast test film are incorrect when the host
is controlling the density and is controlling density or contrast. Refer Image Processing
contrast. perceives the image for more information.
density.
6. The OEM monitor is out of 6. Bring up a SMPTE pattern on the OEM screen. Be sure
adjustment. the window and level is at the OEM defined specification
for a SMPTE pattern. The 95% and 5% patches should be
equally visible. If not, have the OEM adjust the contrast
and brightness and lock them down.
Film (user and Films are upside down in the Try a new cartridge, or take films to a darkroom and flip.
internal tests) have a cartridge.
mottled and extremely
grainy look to them.
Grainy or bizarre One of the higher order digital Use a digital tester using 256 grays. This will print a 256
images for all users bits to or at the optics is grayscale stepwedge that will make the problem easier to
and on density test. getting dropped. diagnose. All 256 steps should be visible and should
Step wedge does not increase gradually in density. Reseat cables from IPB
progress in the optics control cable to bulkhead to optics. If problem
normal manner. remains, order optics module and/or cables.
Images do not One of the lower order digtial Use a digital tester using 256 grays. This will print a 256
transition smoothly bits to or at the optics is grayscale stepwedge that will make the problem easier to
from one grey level to getting dropped. diagnose. All 256 steps should be visible and should
the next in a flat field. increase gradually in density.
Instead, it appears to Reseat cables from IPB optics control cable to bulkhead to
jump from one grey Optics. If the problem remains, order optics module and/or
level to a significantly cables
darker or lighter grey
level. This can only
be seen in images
with a relatively flat
grey field.
VIDEO setup. One Video Start frame is set Set it to the other option in MPC/IMS/Config/Start Frame.
user only. Bizarre incorrectly. Note: Refer to 969 QuickSheets for an example of
images. incorrect Start Frame setting.
1999 Rev. F 3-22
3-4-5. Marks, Blotches, and Artifacts on the Film

Intermittent green/brown High humidity can cause The water cannot be seen or felt on the rollers, but
marks on film. moisture to be absorbed by it is there. There are two methods to determine if
the transport rollers and this is the problem.
cause marks on the films Use a hair dryer to dry the rollers and see
intermittently. if the problem disappears.
Put water on a roller and let it soak in. Run
a print and see if the new marks you just
created resemble the marks you are trying
to identify.
Solution: Recommend better humidity control in
the hospital. Relocate the machine away from the
cooling vent.
Dark specs blotches, etc. on Dust or debris in the optics Clean the platen. Refer to PM procedures in
the film. platen. service manual. Do not allow the dust to migrate
as you are cleaning it, or it may land on the optics
mirrors or the beam power monitor board.
Dirty or hazy films. Processor is dirty. Clean the processor. Refer to the service manual
for PM procedure.
Dark thin shadow about one Stainless steel screws on Paint screws with flat black paint. Remove screws
inch long on greyout at upper optics platen kicker are from the machine when painting.
left and right. reflecting light from optics.
Two clear areas on the The optics platen kicker Reform the kicker assembly, so it is out of the last
extreme top left and right area assembly is in the laser path. path.
of a film.
3-4-6. Miscellaneous Problems

Cannot get clear borders on an Set the MPC/IMS/Image/Match
DryView 8800 to a wet laser. Border to NO. Also, a border density
in MPC/IMS/Image should be set to
4095.
Film emulsion is peeling at the Clear border lines is not set. Using MPC/SCB/Config, set the
bottom of the film. clear border lines to 84 (default).
Density variation greater than .24 Optics module is causing density Replace optics module.
across a 1.65 to 1.95 flat grey field. variation. If the density variation does not
change when the film is reversed in
the cartridge or a new lot of film is
tried, the optics may be the problem.
1999 Rev. F 3-23

Reverse images (negative) with host Host is sending a contrast table of 16
control. or higher in the DZO command. One
through fifteen are positive contrast
tables, sixteen through thirty are
negative. Example:
DZO,x,x,x,x,x,x,x. Images 5,6,7,8 are
all printed at a contrast of 16. This
will be a negative image. 5 16 6 16 7
16 8 16
Yellow tint or tone to the film. 1. Viewbox bulbs are old. 1. Install new bulbs.
2. Viewbox bulbs are cool white. 2. Use daylight bulbs.
3. Film Dmax is greater than 3.1 or 3. Check Dmax and Dmin with a
Dmin is greater than~.22. densitometer.
Note: Dmin must be checked on the
100% square of a density test. If
Dmax or Dmin is out of spec,
determine the cause. For example:
heater temperature is out of spec,
AIQC off, DryView 8700/8500
densitometer off, etc.
4. The DryView film has some 4. Kodak is working on a new
yellow tint to it. formulation.
3-4-7. Partially Image Page

Partially Imaged Data. 1. Look for a parity error in the error log. 1. Refer to the appropriate error code
The imager flags the sheet as bad by QuickSheet.
printing clear borders after the point on
the sheet where the parity error occurs.
The print job is retried. If the print
succeeds, the user will have one good
sheet and one bad one. If it fails the
second attempt, the print job is killed
and the images for that film are deleted
from memory.
2. Some host control systems print a 2. Refer to the Technical Reference
partial page under the following Manual for modality specfic information.
circumstances (and others not
identified):
The host sends some acquire
command to the imager
Before the host is done with the
page, the imager sends a status or
error message to the host . For
example: memory full.
1999 Rev. F 3-24

The host does not handle the error
correctly, and may do any of the
following:
– Skip frames within a sheet
resulting in a film with missing
images.
– Print the partially imaged page,
then reacquire and reprint the
same page. The user ends up
with one partially imaged page
and one full page.
– May get totally confused and
print nothing, or start printing
images from another day or
week.
– May stop sending images to the
imager, and display an error on
the host system.
3-4-8. Scratches
Many scratches are caused by temporarily deposited debris on one of the film guide or cooling plates. Use
a doubled up film to scruff up the suspected area that is scratching. If this does not fix the scratches, the
next step is to use some fine 15 micron lapping paper. Note that using the lapping paper will require
cleanup and may take awhile.
Do not damage the sensor arms when using a film to try and knock debris off the plates.
Scratches in the DryView 8700/8500 tend to come and go and therefore can be difficult to isolate. In some
cases the scratches are temporary and are caused by a foreign substance that is stuck to a surface on the
DryView 8700/8500. These temporary scratches may last a few sheets or a few hours. For all scratching
problems, try the following methods to isolate the problem.

Scratch at drum or exit area. Turn off the machine when the film is just past the densitometer. Use MPC to
monitor the densitometer sensor. Check the film to determine if the scratch is
before or after the developer drum.
Scratch after optics and Remove a sheet of film from the cartridge and insert it in the optics module
before the drum. (emulsion side up). When the DryView 8700/8500 is power cycled it will clear the
film and run it through the rest of the machine.
Scratch is before the drum. If the scratch is before the drum the two most likely spots are the first guide after
the pickup, and the turnaround guide just before the drum. Sand these with 15
micron lapping paper.
Do not damage the sensor arms when sanding these areas. Also, be sure to clean
the sanded area thoroughly before running prints. Even with cleaning, it may
require running 15 or more films before the loose sanding particles are removed
from the system.
1999 Rev. F 3-25

Scratch is after the drum. Tape a sheet of 15 micron lapping paper to a sheet of film, crease the film several
times across the width of the film (and attached lapping film), and run it through the
densitometer and exit area using MPC/SCB/Diagnostics/motors to run the exit
motor.
Scratch before the optics. Initiate a print and open the side door when the film is in the optics module.
Carefully remove the film and see if the film has any scratches, inspect the film in
the cartridge. If the film in the cartridge is okay, but the film is getting scratched by
the time it gets to the optics, the scratches are likely coming from the first guide
plate after pickup.
3-4-9. Size of Images

Images are smaller than they MPC pixel correction is set to NO. Set MPC/Setup/IMS/Host/Pixel
were on a 959 or 969. Correction to YES. If acquires fail after
changing this parameter, set it back to
NO. Refer to Section 5-5-5-4 for Image
Processing, Image Size for more
details.
3-4-10. Troubleshooting Blank Film Complaints

The following procedure should be used to check the peformance of the laser if the beam power monitor is
functioning all right. Do not assume that the problem lies with the optics modules.

Blank Film Complaints In the MPC command window:
1. Type: show power –1
Response: show y “x”
Comment: Step 1 tests the beam power monitor offset value, which
can be set from one to 25. At New Ulm, the value
is set to 12.
2. Type: set laser 0 (full power)
Response: set y
Type: set attenuator 200
Response: set y
Type: show power
Response: show y “p”
Comment: Step 2 sets the maximum power with attenuator throttling
the power at the film plane. The approximate
value of "p" is 2000. If it is <1500, there may be an optics
problem.
3. Type: set laser 2048 (half power)
Response: set y
Type: show power
Response: show y “p/2”
Comment: Step 3 sets the laser to half power. The output should be
half the value from above, or approximately 1000.
1999 Rev. F 3-26

4. Type: set laser 3072 (1/4 power)
Response: set y
Type: show power
Response: show y “p/4”
Comment: The output should be 1/4 of the value in step 2
(approximately 500).
5. To check attenuator performance, do the following:
Type: set laser 3072 (1/4 power)

Response: set y
Type: set attenuator to 490 (maximum transmission)
Response: set y
Type: show power
Response show y “k”
Comment “k” should be ~3000 (15 mW). To verify this value, get the
max laser power from the MPC printer log (mW*100).
Multiply this value by 2 for the maximum power in beam
power monitor equivalent units.
Example: printer log value = 5868 (58.68 mW)
Beam power monitor value = 5868*2 = 11736
counts “k” = 11736/4 = 2934
6. Type: set laser 0
Response: set y
Type: set attenuator to –999 (home position)
Response: set y
Type: show power
Response show y “m”
Comment “m” should be 1/10 max power from the MPC printer log
(~1170 from the above example)
If the tests above turn out OK, check the following components:
cables (at the optics and at the SCB)
SCB
IPB
1999 Rev. F 4-1

4-1. System Control Board (SCB)
4-1-1. SCB NVRAM

The SCB NVRAM (U8C1) stores the SCB, PROC and AIQC parameters. Refer to Figure 4-1.
SCB NVRAM IPB NVRAM (U19 chip on IPB)

Proc Drum Temp Set Points
IMS Comm Image Host System
AIQC Speed Vary, Idle Btwn Cal, . . .

EIB Config Clock
Prints, filter count, pickup arm Error History Maintenance Port

SCB/Config.
height, # of lines, . . . (MPC/Modem board)
8700–255L
Figure 4-1. SCB NVRAM
Whenever you replace the SCB, do the following backup and restore procedure to preserve the
current parameters:
1. Back up the system before replacing the SCB. Save the backup as a new file. Do not overwrite the old
file. The SCB may have corrupted values. Save the old backup until you are satisfied the new backup is
not corrupted.
2. Replace the SCB.
3. Restore the new backup file. This restores the drum temperature setpoints and the parameters in the
SCB/Config and AIQC screens.
4. Set the MPC/SCB/Config/Clear Border lines to 84 (default), save, and power cycle the DryView
8700/8500.
5. Check temperatures and run a print.
Besides the MPC parameters you back up during installation, the SCB NVRAM also stores many other
system and LUT parameters that are not backed up via MPC. If the SCB is behaving abnormally, and you
suspect the NVRAM is corrupted, do the following:
1. Back up the system using a new file. (Keep the old backup.)
2. Do an MPC/File/ Restore on the printer having the problem: c:winmpc\SCBINITO.SC for DryView
8700/8500 dual printer 0, c:winmpc/SCBINIT1.SC for DryView 8700/8500 dual printer 2. (This will
reinitialize all the SCBNVRAM). A new script file would appear as follows: SCBinit0.sc send printer s=0
~set memb=0x320100,4~ send printer s=0 ~set memb=0x331000,4~ (If this were SCBinit1.sc, the
printer s=1.)
3. Power cycle. (The local panel will be blank for the first 30 seconds.)
4. Wait until EC154 and EC622 appear on the local panel, and until the pickup arm height calibration is
done. (There will be a clunking noise as the feed roller is moved up and down repeatedly. Allow the
process to finish.)
5. Power cycle again. The system should come up OK now.
6. Restore the MPC backup you made in step 1. This will restore the drum temps setpoints and the
parameters in the SCB/Config screen.
7. Set the SCB/Config/Clear Border lines to 84 (the default), save the screen and power cycle the
DryView 8700/8500.
8. It is possible that the SCB NVRAM was corrupted at the time you made the new backup. If the new
backup does not work correctly, try the old backup.
1999 Rev. F 4-2
4-1-2. SCB Component Diagram

Refer to Figure 4-2 for location of components on the SCB.
TP4A1+17v To Service Sw SCB Software
TP1A1+5v 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A 1213
TP1A2Gnd U9B1
1
2 Motor and
B
1 Solenoid
TP1C1–17v U8C1 0 Control to
NVRAM
MIB
C
DS1C1+17v
from MIB U9D1
D
DS1D1 –17v
from MIB SCB
E SW10F1
Reset
Switch
F
1
MultiFd 2
and Beam 0
Power G 4
Monitor +5,+–17v
from MIB
DS10H1
H +5v LED
1
Barcode 2
I 0
Reader
3 1
2
J Serial
DS9I1 Tx 0
Comm
to IPB 8
1 to IPB
2 DS10J1 Rx
K
Densitometer 0 from IPB
2
L
1
2 Power
0 Distribution
M Board and
7
Sensors
N 1205 1206
Local Panel Optics 8700–256L
Figure 4-2. SCB Component Diagram

1999 Rev. F 4-3
4-1-3. SCB Power Up Sequence

Refer to Figure 4-3 for location of components involved in the SCB power up sequence. The sequence, if
initiated by the Reset Switch proceeds as follows:
1. The Reset Switch is pressed (0 seconds).
2. At 5 seconds:
The SCB segment display shows three bars.
The SCB has passed self test.
The local panel will start some display checks about this time.
3. The TX LED flashes, indicating communication between the SCB and IPB.
4. At 10 seconds the segment display starts rotating.
SCB
SW10F1
Reset
U7G1 Switch
Segment
Display DS10H1
+5VDC
from MIB
Tx LED
8700–257L
Figure 4-3. SCB Power Up Sequence

1999 Rev. F 4-4
4-1-3-1. The Segment Display

The updating of the rotation on the segment display is the lowest priority function for the SCB. Therefore,
the display may occasionally rotate slower than usual because of other tasks that are higher priority for the
SCB. For example, after a calibrate sheet, the SCB has to process the data from the densitometer. Also,
when running a contrast test, the SCB has to calculate and upload the 15 LUT’s (look up tables) to the IPB
over a serial communication line.
SCB Watchdog Timer Circuit

The interlock switches in the DryView 8700/8500 are pulsed both high and low every second for safety
reasons. The following chart explains the reasoning.
Table 4-1. SCB Interpretation
SCB Sends to Switch Interlock Feedback

Hi Hi = door closed, Low = door open
Low Hi = short Low = undefined
If the SCB sends out a low to an interlock and receives back a high, the watchdog timer circuit on the SCB
shuts down the SCB after 8 seconds. The rotating segment display on the SCB goes blank. The watchdog
timer circuit could also shut down the SCB if it got locked up and could not check the interlocks every 8
seconds.
4-1-3-2. SCB Segment Display is Blank

Problem: The SCB is shutting down. (The segment display is blank even though the+5 volt and +/–17 volt
power LEDs are lit, indicating that power is applied to the SCB).
Cause: The SCB software has hung up during a task, and the SCB watchdog timer has shut down the
SCB. (Refer to Section 4-6-5 for information on the watchdog timer circuit.)
Solution: Determine what events preceded the software lockup, and try to reproduce them if possible.
Cause: A hardware problem such as a shorted wire to the interlock feedback has cause the watchdog
timer circuit to shut down the SCB.
Solution: Monitor the interlocks using the breakout box. Refer to Sections and .
Solution: Try disconnecting cables as indicated below to isolate a possible wiring problem.
Power down and disconnect all cables except the following: power cable from the MIB and either the
MIB control cable (CN1210) or the sensor cable (CN1207). The control cable and the sensor cable
cannot be disconnected at the same time or the SCB will shut down.
Power up and check to see if the shutdown problem has disappeared.
If disconnecting the cables seemed to fix the problem, reconnect the cables one at a time and power up
after each reconnection to isolate the faulty cable.
If removing the cables did not isolate the problem, check power to the SCB. If power is OK, the SCB is
bad.
1999 Rev. F 4-5
4-1-4. Power Up Communications Between the SCB and IPB

The SCB communicates with the IPB via an RS422 serial line at 19200 baud. The IPB initiates
communication via commands or status requests, and the SCB responds. Refer to Figure 4-4 for an
illustration of this communication sequence. If the SCB does not receive communication from the IPB in 45
seconds, the SCB displays EC910 on the local panel. Refer to EC910 in Section 2 for troubleshooting
information.
To capture this log:
1. Power up the DryView 8700/8500.
2. Monitor communications by using MPC/Monitor/Slot0
3. Reset the SCB via SW10F1, and queue up a density test from a keypad or the local panel.
SCB IPB
1. IPB requests STATUS, SCB requests a clock

reset.
Sheet count MS = 125

S:0,P:0,Tx:SA
Busy by
S:0,P:0,Rx:Y MS=125 by CK RS
Clock Reset CK RS
2. IPB resets SCB clock.
S:0,P:0,Tx:ST CK=96,02,06,13,16,23
S:0,P:0,Rx:Y
3. IPB requests digital value it can use to image

the Dpatch.
S:0,P:0,Tx:SH DP
S:0,P:0,Rx:Y DP=344
4. IPB requests Media type and size.
S:0,P:0,Tx:SH MT
S:0,P:0,Rx:Y MT=B1,E14x17
5. IPB sets local panel to IPB NVRAM Dmax,

density, contrast for user 1 . . . user 2.
S:0,P:0,Tx:ST LC=300,1,6,300,1,5
S:0,P:0,Rx:Y
8700–258L
1999 Rev. F 4-6
SCB IPB
6. IPB requests status updates from SCB.
Sheet count = 125

S:0,P:0,Tx:SA
Busy
S:0,P:0,Rx:Y MS=125 by PW=2
Processor warming=2 min.
7. IPB requests status updates from SCB.
SCB is closing cartridge

S:0,P:0,Tx:SA
(CC).
S:0,P:0,Rx:y MS=125 by CC PW=2
8. IPB requests staus updates from SCB.
SCB is opening cartridge

S:0,P:0,Tx:SA
(CO).
S:0,P:0,Rx:Y MS=125 by CO PW=2
9. IPB requests film cartridge emulsion code.
SCB is opening cartridge S:0,P:0,Tx:Show EmulCode

(CO). S:0,P:0,Rx:Show Y Emulcode=01035008
10. SCB reports a calibrate flag (CF).
CF means the SCB is retrieving the last stored

calibrate sheet values from SB NVRAM.
PR CR means the SCB is printing a calibrate sheet
(or has a calibrate sheet queued).
S:0,P:0,Tx:SA
S:0,P:0,Rx:Y MS=16 by ML CF PW=2
11. IPB requests media type and size.
Media type is blue 14x17.

S:0,P:0,Tx:SH MT (Show Media Type)
S:0,P:0,Rx:Y MT=B1,E14x17
12. IPB requests Show Maximum Density for blue

film.
S:0,P:0,Tx:SH MD=BL
S:0,P:0,Rx:Y MD=310
8700–259L
1999 Rev. F 4-7
SCB IPB
13. IPB requests Dmax density to print border at.
Print border at digital

S:0,P:0,Tx:SH BK=300
value of 0.
S:0,P:0,Rx:Y BK=0
14. IPB requests download of contrast table for

text and Dpatch.
S:0,P:0,Tx:SH TB=31,300,0 (show table)

S:0,P:0,Rx:Y
TB=8000000000e19c6789713e31c478bf12e2
3c5f88f11e2dc478b710e21c5b88710e2bc3f8
af10e1fc5387f0fe29c3b87f13e1dc4................
.........................................
15. IPB requests download of contrast table at -

Contrast 6 - Dmax 3.0 - User 0.
S:0,P:0,Tx:SH TB=6,300,0
S:0,P:0,Rx:Y
TB=87c851389b5138d36d36a34a26d351269
44d26da4d269a6924d329a6624924cb49969
24d32ca69249349a45a4ca6924d24d24d1......
..........................................
8700–260L
Figure 4-4. Power Up Communications Between SCB and IPB

1999 Rev. F 4-8
4-1-5. IPB to SCB Commands and Responses

The following commands and responses can be viewed using MPC/Monitor/Slot0. The commands can be
sent via the MPC/Diagnostics/SCB/Cmd window.
IPB Print Command

S PRint (density) (SG second sheet) (NP NoPatch) (type) (BO)
– (type) – CLcalibrate GRGreyout HIBinttest TOtrsport only
– (BO) – BOrder specified digital value to use for top and bottom border. (8800/8700/8500 with HIB)
SCB Response
Y (yes, sheet ID)
; NEr; NBy; N Cf
IPB Set Command

LC = (Dmax, Density, Contrast user 1; user 2)
MS = display message on local panel
MR = Clear message from local panel
CK = set clock on SCB
TF = xx load Transfer function table into temporary storage
TF (without value) clear loaded TFT
FM = load film model into temporary storage
FM (no value) clear film model
SCB Response
Yes
N No, reason
BT Bad table
Nr No wrong number of parameters
Nm Not enough memory
1999 Rev. F 4-9
IPB Show Command

LC Local panel settings
MD max Dmax for film type
Mt Media size and type
Dp value to use for Dpatch
Bk Digital values for 16 Dmax values for the film
Tb (table) (Dmax) to obtain a LUT at a Dmax value
R1 Release level
Sy System type
Sh = x show status of sheet id x
SCB SHOW Response
YLC = ct1 ( contrast requested user1) st1 (smpte req) SH = (id) (Value) Queued, Exposed, Failure,
Done no error, U unknown sheet id.
General SCB Status Responses

Ao Access panel open
Af Transport access interlock failed
By Printer is busy
Cc cartridge closing
Ce Supply cartridge has an error
Cf1 Pickup top fail
Cf2 Pickup middle fail
Cf3 Film out sensor fail
Cf4 Pickup arm motor fail
Cf5 Rollback sensor fail
Cf6 Rollback home sensor fail
Cf7 Rollback motor fail
Cf8 Tongue depressor sensor fail
Cf calibrate in progress
Ck Clock reset request from SCB
Co Cartridge opening
1999 Rev. F 4-10
General SCB Status Responses (Continued)

Do Media supply door is open.
Df Double feed.
Dpk double pickup.
Fc Cartridge failed to close.

Fif Front interlock fail.
Fo Cartridge failed to open.
Gaf GSM* attenuator test failure during optics diagnostics. *GMS = Gray Scale Manager Software
Module (AIQC)
GBC GSM detected a bad contrast.
Gbd GSM received bad densitometer data.
Gbf GSM detected a bad film model table.
Gbx GSM detected a bad transfer function table.
Ge Generic error, printer is unable to print.
Gff GSM detected film is fast.
Gfs GSM detected film slow.
Gcf GSM detected a corrupt film model table.
Gdf GSM detected a densitometer hardware failure.
Gia GSM detected a problem with the attenuator.
Gld GSM detected a problem with the laser dynamic range.
Gpo GSM detected a problem with the beam power monitor.
Gpr GSM detected a problem with the beam power monitor range.
Gmf GSM detected the midtone density is fast.
Gms GSM detected the midtone density is slow.
Gnf GSM detected no film model for the loaded cartridge.
Gw Generic warning
Hv HIB version error. Software/Hardware version not compatible.

Hr HIB register test failed.
Hm HIB memory test failed.
Hf HIB test printed requested.
Hp Hib detected parity error during printing.
1999 Rev. F 4-11

If filter needs to be inserted.
Ja Jam at supply area.

Jb Jam to exposure.
Jc Jam exposure.
Jd Jam to processor.
Je Jam in processor.
Jf Jam at densitometer.
Jg Jam at exit.
Jz Jams (Different area from other jam indicators)
LC local panel setting changed.

Lf Local panel has a failure.
Lif Left side interlock failure.
Lmf film almost fast.
Lms film almost slow.
Mo Media supply is out.

MS = sheets; M1 media is low.
Nc Supply cartridge is missing.

Nop printer is not operational due to an error.
Npk No pickup.
Nr Not ready.
Nv NVRAM checksum error detected at power up.
Oa Optics attenuator fail.

Od Optics module disconnected fail.
Oe Optics module EOL fail.
Oif Optics override interlock fail.
OL open loop
1999 Rev. F 4-12

Oo Optics PLL fail.
Ot Optics temp fail.
Pc Processor communication fail

Pd PRocessor drum failure
Pk Pickup error after retries count in MPC
Pf Processor is not functional
Pn Processor bad data error
Po Processor over temp
Pp Processor pend failure
Pr printer is transporting film
Ps A cartridge Panic Stop error occurred during opening/closing of supply cartridge.
Pt Processor timeout failure.
Pu Processor under temp
Pw = (minutes) Processor warming
Px Processor warmup fail
P1 Zone 1 fail
P2 Zone 2 fail
P3 Zone 3 fail
Rf Filter needs to be replaced

Rs SCB has been reset
Sf Supply door interlock failed.
Tif Top cover interlock fail.

1999 Rev. F 4-13
4-2. Processor
4-2-1. Rotating Processor Board and Drum component Diagram

Refer to Figure 4-5 for a view of components on the Rotating Processor Board (RPB).
LED is on back
side of board.
D11 (green) Rx
LED is on front side data indicator.
of board. D10 (yellow) Tx
data indicator. Thermistors (green, orange, and
blue wires)
~1090 ohms at room temp.
TP2 Gnd ~1460 ohms at operating temp.
JP
1
TP1 +5v
RPB Receiver
Transmit LED
D12 +5v
LED (green)
LED Side
Heaters on. D5 D6 D4
LED D4 Center
Heater on.
1/4 A Fuse JP6

(120v line)
Center Heaters. (Black wires) ~13

End Heaters. (Red and white wires) ohms. Thermal limit fuse is in line
~95 ohms. Thermal limit fuse is in with the heaters.
line with the heaters. 120v from
brushes. 8700–261L
Figure 4-5. Rotating Processor Board (RPB) (End View)
Note
After approximately three years, the limit fuses inside the drum can open due to fatigue. If one fails,
replace all three.
1999 Rev. F 4-14
4-2-2. Processor CommunicationBoard Component Diagram

Refer to Figure 4-6 for an illustration of Processor Communication Board functions.
Green DS5 Yellow DS3 Green DS1

Reflect Signal Rx Data Tx Data
Rotating Processor
Board (RPB)
Temperature PDB SCB

U3
Temp Request
Reflect DS4
Drum
Brushes PCB - Processor Comm. Board

8700–262L
Figure 4-6. Processor Communication Board (PCB) Component Diagram

1999 Rev. F 4-15
4-2-3. Processor Theory of Operation
4-2-3-1. Processor Motor Enabled

At power up, a 24VDC pulsating signal is applied to the processor motor. The signal can be monitored at
testpoints on the MIB. Refer to Figure 4-7.
At power up, a 24VDC pulsating signal is applied to the

processor motor. MIB Test points for the motor will show the
following signal during normal operation.
24V
0v
With the motor disconnected, the Test Points will

show the following waveform:
24V
Drum 0v
Processor MIB SCB

Motor
8700–263L
Figure 4-7.
1999 Rev. F 4-16
4-2-3-2. PCB Transmits and Receives Reflected (Rotation) Light

Refer to Figure 4-8 for a functional diagram of PCB operation:
Green DS5
Reflect Signal Yellow Green
Rotating Processor
Board (RPB)
U3
Temps
Temps
Reflect DS4
Drum PDB SCB
Reflect
8700–264L
Figure 4-8.
1. As the motor turns the drum, drum home sensor DS4 transmits light to the rotating sensor plate on the
RPB and receives its reflected light back.
2. DS5 (RX LED) on the PCB flashes on when light is received back from the RPB.
3. The PCB then outputs a REFLECT signal to the SCB through the PDB (Power Distribution Board).
Tech Tip: The DryView 8700/8500 sensor monitor cable and breakout box shows the reflect signal at the
SCB input. Refer to Sensor/Interlock Trouble Analysis.
Error State: If the REFLECT signal does not change state within ~4 seconds, EC501, Drum could not be
moved, is declared. Power is removed from the processor motor. The operator must open and close the
top cover to clear the error.
1999 Rev. F 4-17
4-2-3-3. RPB Receives Power

After the first change of state of the processor REFLECT signal, the SCB enables processor power relay
K801, sending 120 volts ac to the rotating processor board via the brushes. Refer to the following figure.
Tech Tip: K801 is located on the right rear wall of the machine, and you can hear its actuation.
When the RPB receives 120v,

LED D12 on the RPB lights
indicating +5v on the RPB. Drum
D12
Note: This LED RPB

is on the back side of
the board, and is only
faintly visible from the
front.
120v
8700-265L
Figure 4-9.
Tech Tip: To test power to the RPB:

Open the top cover, slide the processor out, and rotate the PCB out of the way.
!
Caution
The following step sends 120 volts ac to the RPB and the brushes.
Enable K801 by shorting the bottom leg of R4J8 on the MIB to machine ground. (R4J8 is located at
position 4J on the MIB, just below the solenoid test points.
You should hear K801 click on and see LED D12 (green) light on the RPB.
Take voltage measurements on the RPB as desired.
1999 Rev. F 4-18
4-2-3-4. SCB Transmits Request for Status Through the PCB

After one transition of the REFLECT signal, the SCB transmits a request for status through the PCB. Refer
to Figure 4-10.
Green DS1
Green Yellow Tx Data
Rotating Processor
Board (RPB)
U3
Temp Request DS2
DS4
Drum
8700-266L
Figure 4-10.
1999 Rev. F 4-19
4-2-3-5. RPB Receives Request and Transmits Temperature Data

Refer to Figure 4-11. The transmission of temperature data is sequenced as follows:
1. RPB receives the request.
2. Green Rx LED D11 flashes on.
3. RPB reads a voltage based on the drum thermistor resistance. The thermistors (green, orange, and
blue wire sets) should read about 1090 ohms at room temperature and about 1460 ohms at operating
temperature.
4. RPB transmits a reply.
5. Yellow Tx LED D10 flashes on.
D11 D10
JP
1
RPB
8700-267L
Figure 4-11.
Tech Tip: To test the optical receiver on the RPB:

Open the top cover, slide the processor assembly out, and rotate the PCB out of the way.
!
Caution
The following step sends 120 volts ac to the RPB and the brushes.
Enable K801 by shorting the bottom leg of R4J8 to machine ground. You should hear K801 click on and
see LED D12 (green) light on the RPB. (Resistor R4J8 is located at position 4J on the MIB, just below
the solenoid test points.)
If you pass a flashlight over the optical receiver, the green and yellow LEDs on the RPB should turn on.
Watchdog Timer Circuit
If the watchdog timer circuit on the RPB does not detect either of the following it will disable power to the
heaters:
Greater than 4.5 volts dc for the 5–volt logic.
Change of state from the optical receiver every 1.5 seconds.
1999 Rev. F 4-20
4-2-3-6. PCB Receives Temperature Data and Forwards it to the SCB

Yellow DS3 Rx
Green Data Green
Rotating Processor
Board (RPB)
SCB
U3 PDB
Temperature
Temp request DS2
DS4
Drum

8700–268L
Figure 4-12.
Tech Tip: The two PCB optical receivers DS4 and U3 are always on and the related LED indicators should
light as a flashlight is passed over them.
Error State: If the SCB does not receiver a response from the PCB after ten attempts, EC506 Processor
Communication Error is generated by the SCB. The heaters are not turned on and the drum motor is
deenegerized. The operator is instructed to open and close the top cover to clear the error.
Error State: If the SCB receives a response, but the data is invalid (parity errors or corrupted data) EC507
Processor Returning Bad Data is generated by the SCB. The heaters are not turned on and the drum
motor is deenergized. The operator is instructed to open and close the top cover to clear the error.
Error State: If the reported drum temperature is outside the 50 to 300 degree F range, EC507 Processor
Returning Bad Data is generated by the SCB. The heaters are not turned on and the drum motor is
deenergized. The operator is instructed to open and close the top cover to clear the error.
1999 Rev. F 4-21
4-2-3-7. Temperature Control

Once the SCB receives valid data from the drum and RPB, it commands the RPB to apply power to the
heaters.
If the drum temperature is below, 122.2 degrees C, P511, Processor warming, xx minutes until ready, is
displayed.
The SCB is informed of drum temperature via status requests and drum temperature feedback from the
RPB.
The SCB controls power to the heaters by sending a command to the RPB (via the PCB as described
earlier) to turn on the heaters.
The RPB turns the heaters on and off in response to the SCB commands. Refer to Figure 4–13. LEDs
D4, D5, and D6 are lit when power is applied to the heaters.
Drum
Side heaters on.
D5 D6 D4
Note: These LED’s are on the RPB

front side of the board and are easily Center heater on.
detected from the front.
8700-269L
Figure 4-13.
Error State: If the processor does not warm up in the time calculated by the SCB (and displayed on the
local panel), EC509, Processor failed to warm up in allotted time, is generated. The top cover must be lifted
to clear the error.
Error State: If the temperature for any of the three drum zones is reported to be above 290 degrees F,
EC554, Processor Over Temp, is declared, and the SCB turns off heater power. The top cover must be
lifted to clear the error.
Error State : If the temperatures of the three heater zones are not within 70 degrees F of one another,
EC551, EC552, or EC553 is generated.
Thermal Limit Fuses
If the drum temperature exceeds 184 degrees C, the thermal limit fuses, which are in line with the heaters,
will open. Each fuse includes a 184 degree C fuse and a 192 degree C fuse, back to back.
1999 Rev. F 4-22
4-2-3-8. Reported Drum Temperatures

The temperatures reported from the processor are logged, and can be retrieved via MPC/Log/Printer
Log/Processor. Figure 4-14 shows an example log of a warmup cycle:
Note that the readings run in groups of four. The beginning of the example log shows the center heater
with readings of 6715. Toward the end of the example log the readings of the center heater are around
24508.
The readings provide a reference value to the actual temperature in degrees F. 6752 corresponds to a
room ambient temperature of 72 degrees F, while 24508 represents a drum temperature of 252
degrees F.
The ambient reading is not used by the DryView 8700/8500.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Log Display
Processor Retrieve Close
Left Right
Center Ambient
(Warmup log of processor temp values as displayed in MPC>)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6752 6715 6696 11492
6757 6711 6696 11491 6764 6751 6742 11489 6764 6854 6841 11486 6777 6941 6926
11483 6792 7010 6995 11483 6800 7076 7067 11481 6818 7134 7120 11482 6829 6804
7175 11472 7003 7481 7466 11472 7017 7506 7499 11470 7037 7535 7524 11470 7056
7560 7548 11469 7076 7584 7572 . . . . . . etc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23745 24508 24155 10956. (Drum is up to temperature at this point.)
8700–270L
Figure 4-14.
1999 Rev. F 4-23
Understanding Drum/temperature Setpoints

The internal temperature setpoints are values stored in the SCB NVRAM that indicate the target
temperatures. They can be viewed via the processor calibration screen or by using the
MPC/DIAG/SCB/CMD window and typing in “Show Temps.”
Processor Calibration - (MPC/Setup/Calib)
Drum Surface Temperature Adjustment
Internal Temperature Setpoints

259 (Left Htr.) 243 (Center Htr.) 250 (Right Htr.)
8700–271L
Figure 4-15.
The setpoints are backed up during MPC/backup, and can be viewed by opening the backup file with a
word processor (Notepad, etc.). They are in one of the last lines of the file. Example: Send Printer S=0
~ Set Temps=26364,26026,26455~
The setpoints can be restored by using the Set Temps=x,x,x at the MPC/Diag/SCB/CMD window (x is
the setpoint value for each zone).
Note
The changes made at the SCB CMD window will not take effect until a power cycle occurs.
The temperature setpoint numbers provide a general reference to the actual temperature in degrees F.
For example: 6752 (67.52 F) is a room ambient temperature of 72 degrees F, and 24508 (245.08 F) is
an actual drum temperature of 252 degrees F.
1999 Rev. F 4-24
4-3. Optics
4-3-1. MIB Distributes Power to the Optics Module

The MIB distributes a constant +5 volts dc to the optics module. It also provides ±17 volts dc via the two
optics interlocks (platen door and left door laser interlocks). The interlocks provide the ground return path
for the laser power relay coil on the MIB.
When the relay coil is energized (both doors closed), the relay contacts provide power to the optics
module and also provide a +17 volt signal to the SCB informing the SCB that the optics doors are
closed. The +17 volt signal can be monitored at the service port between the MIB and SCB on pin 58. It
should be high (17 volts) with both doors closed, and low (0 volts) with the doors open or the cable
disconnected.
LED DS6K3 on the MIB will light (amber) when +17 volts is being delivered to the optics.
4-3-2. Optics Self-Tests Performed
4-3-2-1. Attenuator Home Test

The SCB drives the attenuator to its home position.
Error State: If the attenuator cannot be moved to the home position after multiple attempts, EC121,
Attenuator Error, is declared. The imager must be power cycled to clear the error.
Tech Tip:
1. At the SCB command window (MPC/Diag/SCB/Cmd) enter “set attenuator –999”. The MPC sensor
display should show the attenuator in the home position (box checked).
2. At the SCB command window, enter “set attenuator 200”. The MPC sensor display should show the
attenuator box unchecked.
During normal operation the attenuator is stepped to the home position. This position is established
as 0. Ach attenuator position is one step of the stepper motor.
Closed position (full attenuation, clear film,) is typically 80 steps.
Fully open position (minimum attenuation, dark film) is typically 480 steps.
Note
If you are trying to monitor signals during power up, be aware that the optics tests are performed at
power up. They start running a few seconds after the optics kicker solenoid has been energized three
times. All doors must be closed for the optics tests to run.
1999 Rev. F 4-25
4-3-2-2. Optics Connected Test

The SCB uses a dedicated signal called OMCON to detect the presence of an optics module.
Error State: If the OMCON signal is not pulled low by the optics module during power up, EC122, No optics
module, is logged.
Tech Tip: To check the OMCON signal from the optics module, measure on the SCB at the bottom leg of
resistor R7M1. The signal is high with the SCB/Optics control cable disconnected, and is pulled low by the
optics module during normal operation.
4-3-2-3. Optics Temperature Check

The SCB will not run the optics diagnostics at power up until it sees the Y–galvo YTEMPE signal pulled low
by the optics module. The local panel will display “Printer is performing self–test” until the temperature
reaches spec.
Error State: If a 46 to 56 degree C (115 to 132 degree F) temperature is not reached within 15 minutes,
EC123, Optics module temp error, is declared. The machine must be power cycled to clear the error.
Tech Tip: The YTEMPE signal can be checked on the SCB at the top leg of R7N3. The signal should be
high when the optics module is at room temperature (or the optics cable is disconnected), and pulled low
by the optics module when it is up to temperature.
4-3-2-4. Optics EOL Check

Error State: If the SCB is unable to detect the EOL signal from the optics module, EC126, No end of line, is
declared.
Tech Tip: The EOL test signal can be monitored with a logic probe or scope on the SCB at the top leg of
resistor R7N2. It should normally be low, and pulse high during optics diagnostics.
Note
The pulse is very short, but can be seen nicely with a logic probe in Pulse mode.
4-3-2-5. Optics PLL Check

At power up and before each print the SCB checks the XPLL line from the optics module. The signal is high
normally, and is pulled low by the optics module when it determines that the X–galvo is in sync.
Error State: If the line does not pull low, EC151, Optics out of lock, is logged.
Tech Tip: The XPLL signal from the optics module can be checked on the SCB at the top leg of R7N5. It
should be high when the SCB optics cable is disconnected, and pulled low by the optics module.
1999 Rev. F 4-26
4-3-3. Optics Power Mapping
4-3-3-1. Beam Power Monitor Check

A beam power monitor reading is taken at power up with no laser beam striking the BPM board. The value
of this reading should be 13 +/–3.
Error State: If the BPM offset is outside of a 1 to 25 reading, EC601, Invalid offset, is declared.
Tech Tip: The last 15 BPM offset values can be viewed via MPC/Log/Printer Log/Beam Power Monitor
Offset.
1. To test if the BPM board is working:
Tape a flashlight over the BPM board collector chute inside the optics module.
Connect MPC, and retrieve the offset reading. The last reading should be very high (for example:
200). If the readings do not change or are grossly incorrect, the BPM board is not working.
1999 Rev. F 4-27
4-3-3-2. Maximum Laser Power Reading

The maximum laser power reading must be from 50 to 70 mw. The SCB directs the optics module to fire a
laser beam of specific intensity when the attenuator is in the wide open position (not attenuating). (The
attenuator is a rotating polarizing filter within the optics module.) The BPM board then reports to the SCB
its reading of the beam intensity via the BPWR signal line.
Error State: if the maximum laser power reading is not within 50 to 70 mw, EC602 is generated. The laser
must be power cycled to clear the error st ate. Refer to The EC602 QuickSheet for troubleshooting
information.
Tech Tip: To determine maximum laser power:
1. At the MPC/Diagnostic/SCB/CMD window, type “Set laser 3072”. (This applies about 1/4 power.)
2. Type “Set attenuator 480” (minimum attenuation).
3. Type “Show power”. This moves the X and Y galvos to scan across the BPM board so the SCB board
can take a reading.
4. Mulitply the result of the reading times 0.02. The product is the maximum laser power (approximate).
Offset Adjustment
The offset adjustment (see the adjustment section in the Service Manual) controls the offset of the Y galvo,
and thus determines the positioning of the Dpatch with respect to the leading edge of the film. The Dpatch
should be 7 +/– 1 mm from the leading edge. A variation of 3 mm or more can cause the Y galvo to
partially miss the BPM board and provide inaccurate feedback (refer to Figure 4-16). This will result in
EC602 or films that are too dark.
Beam Power Monitor Board

TP1 GND
-12v
+12v
Pot Pot
8700–272L
Figure 4-16.
1999 Rev. F 4-28
4-3-3-3. Attenuator Dynamic Range Calculation

The dynamic range of the attenuator must be between 80 and 120. The SCB sets the laser to a value that
will prevent the BPM from saturating. Then the attenuator is opened fully and a BPM reading is taken
(BPMOpen). The attenuator is than closed and another BPM reading is taken (BPMClosed). The
attenuator dynamic range calculation is log 10 (BPMOpen\BPMClosed).
Error State: If the dynamic range is not within 80 to 120, EC603, Invalid optical density range, is declared.
The machine must be power cycled to clear the error.
To View the Attenuator Dynamic Range:
1. At the SCB command window, type in “Set lpprintf=84 (but do not send yet).
2. Reset the SCB via Reset Switch10F1.
optics tests sequentially and “AOD Range.....” will display. The valid range is .8 to 1.2 (80 to 120).
Note
4-3-3-4. Laser Dynamic Range Calculation

The laser dynamic range must be between 200 and 4000. The SCB first sets the attenuator to a position
which will prevent laser power from saturating the BPM. The SCB then directs the optics module to fire a
laser beam from low level to maximum power. The laser maximum power divided by minimum power is the
laser dynamic range.
Error State: If the laser dynamic range is not within the 200 to 4000 range, EC604, Invalid laser dynamic
range, is declared. The machine must be power cycled to clear the error.
To View the Laser Dynamic Range:
1. At the SCB Command Window, type in “Setlpprint=84 (but do not send yet).
2. Reset the SCB via Reset Switch 10F1.
optics tests sequentially. Look for “Laser Dynamic Range=....”.
Note
4-3-3-5. Attenuator Positioning Check

The SCB directs the optics module to rotate the attenuator to a position which should result in a known
laser power value.
Error State: If the attenuator could not rotate to a position which gives proper power output, EC605 is
generated.
1999 Rev. F 4-29
4-4. Densitometer
4-4-1. Densitometer Trouble Analysis
4-4-1-1. MPC Densitometer Adjustment

Densitometer gain should be set to spec (1640 +/–20) with a range of 3 displayed. Also, offset should be at
20 +/– 2 with a range of 0 displayed. If the range values are not correct, or if the required spec value
cannot be achieved, there is something wrong with the densitometer or the SCB (refer to Section 4-4-2).
As an additional check of densitometer accuracy:
1. Position the black end of a calibrate sheet under the densitometer. MPC should show a range of 0
(X100 amplification).
2. Position a 1.2 to 1.5 density film under the densitometer. MPC should show a range of 1 (X10
amplification). To get a 1.2 to 1.,5 density film, go to MPC/Diag/SCB/Cmd and type “Set laser 0”, then
click OK. Type “Set attenuator 185” and click OK. Then type “pr 1 gr” and click OK.
3. If either of the ranges displayed in the steps above is not correct, something is wrong with the
densitometer or the SCB. (Refer to Section 4-4-2 for more details.)
4-4-1-2. Out of Spec Densitometer Adjustments

It is unlikely that a slightly out of spec densitometer is the cause of AIQC errors. Because of the
autocalibrate ability of the SCB software, out of spec densitometer adjustments do not affect the accuracy
of the densitometer until the gain readings are below 1400 or above 2000. However, if a densitometer is
out of spec, it should still be adjusted.
A densitometer gain below 1400 or above 2000, as reported in MPC, will generate EC561, Invalid
densitometer data.
The offset adjustment is not critical until it approaches 0. Offsets of 0 will cause AIQC errors.
The table below shows results of three calibrate sheets run at three different densitometer gain settings. As
the table shows, gain adjustments from 1403 to 1950 result in nearly duplicate densitometer readings.
Calibrate Sheet Step Calibrate Sheet 1 Calibrate Sheet 2 Calibrate Sheet 3

No. Density Gain = 1640 Density Gain = 1950 Density Gain = 1403
1 3.33 3.30 3.30
12 1.21 1.2 1.195
18 .20 .20 .20
1999 Rev. F 4-30
4-4-1-3. Checking the MPC Dpatch Log

Checking Dpatch Values
MPC/log/Printer log/Dpatch will obtain the last 500 Dpatch readings. These readings should be consistent.
If they jump around, check the sensor. (The last 500 Dpatch values are displayed in order. The last Dpatch
is at the bottom of the log.)
Note
The positioning of the Dpatch is determined by the optics module offset adjustment. The Dpatch must
be 7 +/– 1 mm from the top edge of the film. Refer to the density patch offset adjustment in the
service manual.
Densitometer Sensor
The Dpatch and calibrate sheet are read based on a time delay after the densitometer sensor actuates. If
the sensor is not positioned correctly or is intermittent in its actuation, the Dpatch or calibrate sheet may be
misread.
Tech Tip: Some of the densitometers have a bent mounting bracket that causes the timing to be off.
Readjust the bracket to 90 degrees.
Problem: (DryView 8800 only) Actual Dpatches are normal (1.0-1.4), but printer log/Dpatch shows very
low or very high densities.
Cause: Dmax set to 3.2.
Solution: Set Dmax to 3.1 (4.2 software update will fix this problem). See sheets 1 & 2.
4-4-1-4. Comparing the Calibrate Sheet Density Step Values
Compare the calibrate sheet density step values in MPC/AIQC/DlogE against an external densitometer
measuring the same calibrate sheet. There may be some differences between the two densitometer
readings (light source may be a different wavelength). However, the differences should remain proportional
across the steps. Also, the shape of the DlogE curve should be smooth without any spikes or irregularities.
Irregularities indicate a misreading of the calibrate sheet steps.
Problem: MPC/AIQC/DlogE curve has a spike in it. (Curve is not smooth.) Customers images also have
bad contrast. (Problem only occurs on DryView 8700/8500 Multi–Input systems.)
Cause: Calibrate sheet was misread due to a sofware bug. This problem usually occurs first thing in the
morning or on Monday morning after a weekend with no use.
Solution: Customer should run another calibrate sheet. Software update 4.2 will fix this problem.
1999 Rev. F 4-31
4-4-2. Densitometer Theory of Operation
4-4-2-1. Densitometer Sensor Actuates

Refer to the following table and to Figure 4-17.
Action Result Measured At

Sensor actuates (Emitter light The EXIT SW signal goes high JP3 on Densitometer Board pin 2
patch is unblocked.) (+5 vdc). or SCB CN1202 pin 6.
Densitometer Board SCB
Exit Sensor CN201 CN1202

JP3 +5
+17
3
-17
Drv 2 Exit SW Signal 11 6
1 +5 2 1
8700–274L
Figure 4-17.
1999 Rev. F 4-32
4-4-2-2. Densitometer Emitter Turns On

Return to the following table and to Figure 4-18.

SCB makes DENSON signal go Densitometer emitter turns on. TP1 shows current draw of
low. emitter (about 50 mv at 1640
MPC value). 50 mv = 50 ma LED
current draw
Light Source Board Densitometer Board SCB

R2 Gain Adjust
CN201 CN1202
–9v
Feedback Emitter TP1

Detector
DENSON
1 13 10
(on = low)
2
3 2 1
Film
+5v
Densitometer
Detector Circuit
8700–275L
Figure 4-18.
1999 Rev. F 4-33
4-4-2-3. Densitometer Collector Signal Amplified and Sent to SCB

Refer to the following table and Figure 4-19.
4-4-2-4. Densitometer Collector Signal Amplified and Sent to SCB

Refer to the following table and to Figure 4-19.

Densitometer collector detects 1. Densitometer signal DGNSA 1. TP2 on densitometer board or
light, and the signal is amplified in NALOG changes (range of 0 to 5 SCB TP3G1 (input to A/D).
one of three circuits (X1, X10 or volts.
X100) before it reaches TP2 on 2. G10flag signal (gain X10) or 2. G10flag on SCB U10M1 pin 7.
the densitometer. For X10 G100flag signal (gain X100) G100flag on SCB U10M1 pin 6.
amplification G10flag goes low. changes.
For X100 amplification both
G10flag and G100flag go low.
Densitometer Board SCB
Film
X1 TP2 CN201 CN1202
15
8 Dgnsanalog A/D
X10
Collector 14 TP3G1
G10 flag Pin 12
RT1 adjusts offset

of signal G100 flag 5 Pin 9
X100 2 1
U10M1
G100 6
G10 7
8700–276L
Figure 4-19.
As a general rule:
X1 amplification is done on films with densities of 0 to 0.9.
X10 amplification is done on films with densities of 1.0 to 1.8.
X100 amplification is done on films with densities of 1.9 and above.
1999 Rev. F 4-34
4-4-2-5. SCB Does Analog to Digital Conversion

The SCB uses the DGNSANALOG signal and the two gain signals to determine a digital value for the
densitometer reading.
Example 1: With collector signal strength at maximum (clear film in the densitometer), the voltage
measured at TP2 has been amplified X1. The G10flag and G100flag signals from the densitometer are
both high, which allows the SCB to determine that the densitometer signal it is receiving has been amplified
X1.
Example 2: With collector signal strength at a low level (dark film), the voltage measured at TP2 has been
amplified 100 times. Both gain signals are low, which allows the SCB to determine that gain is 100.
The example in the following table was recorded while using MPC/Diagnostic/Densi. This turns the
densitometer emitter on momentarily every 3 seconds. During the time the emitter is on:
The SCB digitizes the analog signal and the result is displayed on the MPC screen.
The densitometer analog signal to the SCB can be measured at TP2 (or SCB TP3G1).
The densitometer amplification signals G10flag and G100flag can be measured. (The MPC does this
job for us and displays a RANGE value.)
Film Density Collector TP2 MPC Gain MPC Range

Amplification Readout Readout
No film in X1 (G10 and 3.8 volts 1640 3
densitometer G100flags high)
Clear border 0.22 X1 (G10 and G100 2.2 volts 1013 3
density flags high)
1.82 density X10 (G10flag low, 3.4 volts 262 1
G100flag high)
3.0 density X100 (G10 and 0.3 volts 135 0
G100flags low)
1999 Rev. F 4-35
4-5. AIQC
4-5-1. Optics Laser Power and Attenuator Dynamic Range Mapping at Power Up
At power up the laser diode intensity range and the attenuator positioning range are mapped. (Refer to the
optics theory of operation for more details.) As a result of this mapping the SCB determines the laser diode
intensity and attenuator position required to deliver a laser intensity to the film of 3.3 LogE. Refer to
Figure 4-20, which shows the laser path during the basic imaging process.
Scan #1000 Scan #1
Optics Module Laser Path Optics Platen
Laser Attenuator Y-Galvo X-Galvo

Diode Mirror Mirror
Optics Platen Access Door
Beam Power 8700–277L

Monitor Board
Figure 4-20.
1999 Rev. F 4-36
4-5-2. Calibration Sheet Imaging
Initiating a Calibration Sheet

A calibration sheet can be initiated by any of the following:
1. The local panel Calibrate button.
2. Loading a new lot or band of film into the imager.
Note
The AIQC keeps track of the last two lot numbers. For example: Film lot # 1028–011B2–02580 (B
indicates Band B).
3. Movement of the attenuator beyond desired boundaries in attempting to keep the Dpatch within target.
(Refer to Section 4-5-4-2.)
4. Inserting a cartridge or power cycling when AIQC is off.
5. If a specified period of time has elapsed since the last print. This period is set via
MPC/SETUP/AIQC/Config/Idle Minutes Between Calibration.
Running a Calibrate Sheet

Refer to Figure 4-21, which shows the components involved in running a calibrate sheet. As can be seen
from the diagram, a calibrate sheet completely bypasses the IPB. A calibrate sheet can be run without an
IPB installed (as in the case of the DryView 8700/8500 Dual Printer). Note the following:
During the calibration the attenuator is not moved.
The optics engine board controls the X and Y galvos under direction of the SCB.
The density for each step is determined by the data on the image data lines from the SCB.
1999 Rev. F 4-37
Laser Diode intensity controlled by
image data from SCB.
LOS (Laser Optics System)

Imaging Processing
Board (IPB) OEB Laser Diode
The user image

data lines from
Attenuator
IPB to Optics
Module are NOT
used during a
calibrate sheet. Y
D/A
Con-
verter
Attenuator Power
Cable
LOS
Control
Cable
MIB
System Controller Board (SCB)

Control and timing signals Attenuator is not
(Image data sent through this moved during
cable on a calibrate sheet only.) imaging.
8700–278L
Figure 4-21.
Based on the Beam Power Monitor Readings run at power up (refer to Section 4-3-3-1), the first calibrate
sheet is run with the darkest step of the calibrate sheet receiving a laser intensity of 3.3 LogE.
Tech Tip: The LogE of each step of the calibrate sheet is displayed via MPC/Setup/AIQC/DlogE/Actual
Measured D Log E Data. Whenever an initial calibrate sheet is run, it will use 3.3 LogE as the intensity
level for the darkest step of the grey scale. (This assumes that the default Speed Vary parameter in MPC is
set to the default value 3.) If the first calibrate sheet fails, the second sheet may use a different LogE.
(Refer to Section 4-5-3).
1999 Rev. F 4-38
4-5-3. SCB/Densitometer Reading and Evaluation of Calibrate Sheet
4-5-3-1. Pre-Film Densitometer Reading

When the leading edge of the film actuates the densitometer sensor, the SCB turns on the densitometer
LED and takes a density reading before the film is in the densitometer aperture path. The SCB uses this
information to autocalibrate the densitometer before each sheet.
Error State: If the values returned during the pre–film reading are not within a reasonable range (gain of
1400 to 2000, offset greater than 0), EC561, Invalid densitometer data is generated.
Tech Tip: Because of the autocalibrate ability of the SCB software, the max and min of the densitometer as
reported via the MPC/Diag/Proc/Densi screen (max 1640 ±10, min 20 ±2) can be significantly out of spec
(gain of 1400 to 2000, offset greater than 0) without causing AIQC errors or significantly distorting the
accuracy of the densitometer readings. However, an out of spec densitometer should still be adjusted (refer
to paragraph 4-4, Densitometer, for more information).
4-5-3-2. Calibrate Sheet Reading of Raw Densitometer Data

When the software detects the edge of the film, it looks for the density bars between each calibrated step,
and then samples each step of the calibrate sheet 12 times in the center of each step. (There are 26
steps.)
Tech Tip: Run a calibration sheet. The last 500 densitometer raw data values of the calibration sheet can
be viewed via MPC/log/printer log/Densitometer Raw Data screen. The calibrate values are shown in
groups of 12, and should be close to each other in value. Refer to Figure 4-22 to see a typical set of
calibrate sheet readings.
Note
Bold type shown in the illustration is not used in the actual printer log.
Pre-film reading with

Densitometer LED.
Pre-film reading with Calibrate sheet clear border

Densitometer LED off. readings (bold type) (Dmin). First step of calibrate
sheet (first set of 12).
Second step of
calibrate sheet.
7 157800 157700 157800 157700 157700 157700 157800 157800 157800 157800 157900 157700
157800 157700 157800 157800 157800 157700157900 157800 157800 157800 157800 157900
MPC/LOG/Printer 157800 157700 157800 157900 157700 157900 157900 157900 157800 157900 157800 157800
Log/Densitometer
Raw Data Screen 148900 141500 140300 133000 124800 116500 109500 101100101100 101100 101100 101100
101100 101000 101000 101100 101100 101100 101200 100700 100700 100800 100800 100800
100800 100700 100700 100800 100700 100700 100700 . . . . .
etc. . . . . . .
......
36 36 35 36 35 35 35 35 35 36 36 36 33 33 34 32 33 33 33 32 32 34 32 33 29 30 29 30 28 29 29 28 29
3030
8700–279L
Last step of calibrate sheet
(darkest step) last set of 12.
Figure 4-22.
1999 Rev. F 4-39
4-5-3-3. Film Speed Determined

Based on the calibrate sheet densitometer readings, the SCB AIQC determines the film speed. This can be
seen using the MPC/AIQC/DlogE screen. Refer to Figure 4-23.
Tech Tip: Each step of the calibrate sheet can be measured with an external densitometer and compared
to the density readings on the DlogE screen. While there may be some differences between the readings
obtained from the DryView 8700/8500 densitometer and the external densitometer, the differences should
remain proportional across the steps.
Actual
Density Log E 1. Darkest step of the calibrate sheet is
measured
3.897 3.3 imaged at a laser intensity of 3.3 Log E,
D Log E data.
3.811 3.25 which resulted in a measured density of
3.755 3.21 3.897.
3.689 3.17
3.63 3.13
3.543 3.09
3.459 3.05 2. Film speed is calculated as the laser
3.285 3 intensity (Log E) that produces a film
3. Film speed density of 3.1 blue (or 3.0 clear). In this
2.86 2.9
2.954. case a Log E between these two steps
2.31 2.8
etc . . . is determined to be the film speed.
8700–280L
Figure 4-23. MPC Dlog E Screen
The film speed value is used to set the attenuator to a position so that a digital value of 0 (black) from the
user (through DIB, DEIB, or VEIB) will result in the Dmax that is set by the customer.
Note
The maximum Dmax values that the user can get is 3.0 for clear film and 3.1 for blue film.
On an DryView 8800 system the local panel can be set to a Dmax value of 3.2, but the DryView
8700/8500 will translate it to 3.1 for blue and 3.0 for clear.
The target film speed is 3.0. If the Speed Vary parameter in MPC/AIQC/Config is set to the default of .3:
AIQC will remain active when the film speed is between 2.6 and 3.4.
System Near Calibration limits will be displayed if the film speed is between 2.6 and 2.7 or between 3.3
and 3.4.
As soon as a successful calibrate sheet passes, the IPB requests and the SCB transmits a value that the
IPB uses to print the Dpatch. This can be viewed via an MPC monitor of slot 0. An example is shown
below:
S:0,P:0,TX:SH DP (Show Dpatch.)
S:0,P:0,RX:Y DP=344
Note
The SCB always gives the same value for the Dpatch.
1999 Rev. F 4-40
If the calibrate sheet completes successfully, printing can begin with AIQC ACTIVE displayed on the
keypads, and a Dmax value on the local keypad. If any of the error codes shown in the table below is
logged, a second calibrate sheet will be generated.
Error State Cause

EC624 Bad densitometer data Dmin of the film is greater than .3 (Can be caused
by film past expiration date, film storage at too high
temperature or too high developer temperature.)
EC624 Bad densitometer data Each step of the calibration sheet is not as dark, or
darker than the previous step. (Density is not
increasing monotonically.) This could be due to a
fogged calibration sheet.
EC625 Film contrast bad Contrast of the calibration sheet is not acceptable.
(Densities of the steps in relation to one another
are unacceptable.)
EC633 Film almost fast The film speed is between 3.3 and 3.4
EC634 Film almost slow The density of step26 is not above 3.1 for blue film
or 3.0 for clear film.
4-5-3-4. If Calibrate Sheet 1 fails, Calibrate Sheet 2 is Read and Evaluated

If the first sheet fails with an EC634, Film Almost Slow, the laser intensity is increased to 3.4 LogE by
opening the attenuator, and a second calibrate sheet is run. If the second sheet passes, no further EC’s are
logged and the system prints in AIQC ACTIVE mode.
If the first sheet failed with an EC633, Film Almost Fast, the laser intensity is decreased to 3.2 LogE by
closing the attenuator, for a second calibrate sheet. If the second sheet passes, not further EC’s are
logged, ands the system prints in AIQC ACTIVE mode.
If any of the error codes shown in the following table occurs, the system changes to AIQC OFF mode (refer
to Section 4-5-5).
Error State Cause

EC624 Bad densitometer data Dmin is above .3 or each step of the calibration
sheet is not as dark, or darker than the previous
step (Density is not increasing monotonically.)
EC631 Film slow The darkest density of step 26 is not above 3.1 for
blue film or 3.0 for clear film.
EC632 Film fast The film speed from the calibrate sheet is above
3.4. (Film speed can be viewed via
MPC/AIQC/DlogE.)
EC625 Film contrast bad The contrast is unacceptable. (Densities of the
steps in relation to one another are out of spec.)
Note
A third calibration sheet is possible if the first two sheets fail because of different EC’s.
1999 Rev. F 4-41
4-5-3-5. Comparing Calibrate Sheet Density Step Values Against Densitometer

Measurement.
Compare the calibrate sheet density step values in MPC/ALQC/DlogE against an external densitometer
measuring the same clibrate sheet. There may be some differences between the DryView 8700/8500
reading and external densitometer readings. (Light source is a different wave length). The differences
should remain proportional across the steps, and the shape of the DlogE curve should be smooth without
any spikes or irregularities. Irregularites indicate a misreading of the calibrate sheet steps.
Problem: MPC/AIQC/DlogE curve has a spike in it. (Curve is not smooth). The customer’s images show
bad contrast.
Cause: Calibrate sheet was misread because of a software bug. This problem usually occurs after the
machine has not been used for awhile such as after a weekend or first thing in the morning.
Solution: Customer should run another calibration sheet. Software Update 4.2 fixes this problem.
4-5-4. AIQC Active Operation

4-5-4-1. Pre-Film Reading
When the leading edge of the film actuates the densitometer sensor, the SCB turns on the densitometer
sensor LED and takes a densitometer reading. Refer to paragraph 4–5–3–1 for a description of this
process.
4-5-4-2. Dpatch Reading

After the densitometer sensor deactuates, the densitometer waits a given period and then reads the
density of what it expects to be the Dpatch:
The top edge of the Dpatch must be 7 +/– 1 mm from the top edge of the film. (Refer to the service
manual for the adjustment.)
The Dpatch must be centered horizontally on the film.
The SCB AIQC software takes 22 samples of each Dpatch and calculates a Dpatch value on the stable
data (i.e., the data not changing in density) in the 22 readings. Refer to Figure 4-24.
Tech Tip: The last 500 Dpatch calculated Dpatch readings can be viewed via MPC/Log/Printer
Log/Dpatch. These readings should be close to those taken with an external densitometer.
Tech Tip: The last 500 densitometer raw data values (22 values for each Dpatch) can be retrieved via
MPC/Log/Printer log/Densitometer Raw Data. If some of the densitometer raw data readings are very low
(e.g., 300), the densitometer may be sampling the border of the film instead of the Dpatch. This can
happen if the densitometer senor is not working correctly or if the film is not transporting reliably.
Pre-film reading with Pre-film reading with Densitometer starts sampling and selects a set
LED off. LED on. of numbers that are stable.
2630 3170 3610 3970 4120 4170 4200 4200 4200 4200 4180 4170 4160 4060 3840 3430
MPC 2940
Screen 2400 1800 1316 829 5 159600 1272 1820 2430 2990 3510 3930 {4220 4340 4380 4410 4440
4450 4460 4470 4460 4440 4320} 4000 3520 2950 2320 1720
8700–340L
Stable readings
Figure 4-24.
1999 Rev. F 4-42
4-5-4-3. Target Dpatch Established

The first Dpatch after a calibration sheet becomes the target Dpatch. This has typically a density of 1.3 to
1.4.
4-5-4-4. SCB/AIQC Control of Dpatch Density

The AIQC software controls Dpatch density by taking the last five Dpatch readings, throwing out the high
and low values, and averaging the remaining three. If the calculated Dpatch average is within 0.05 density
of the target Dpatch, no attenuator change is made. But if the Dpatch average is greater than 0.05 from the
target, the attenuator is moved to bring the Dpatch average closer to target.
Tech Tip: The Dpatch readings and the attenuator readings as displayed via MPC/Log/Printer log should
track together. For example: As a series of Dpatch readings with an attenuator setting of 227 gets
progressively darker, the SCB will close the attenuator to allow less light. The attenuator setting will move
to 224 (for example) and the density of the Dpatches will decrease.
Error State Cause

EC635 Midtone slow or midtone fast The AIQC software allows for Dpatch variation only
within specified limits. If the correction required to
achieve the Dpatch target is greater than 0.1 LogE,
this error is generated. If the second Dpatch
averaged number requires excessive attenuator
correction, EC635 is logged again and a calibrate
sheet is generated.
4-5-4-5. Calibrate Sheet Initiated after Two Dpatch Calculated Averages Out of Spec
Refer to Section 4-5-3 for details on calibrate sheet imaging.
Tech Tip: If AIQC problems are not solved by a calibrate sheet, power cycle the machine. This will cause
the optics laser power tests to be run, which may result in different values for the laser power or attenuator
position readings. You can view the following parameters in MPC/Log/Printer log and make before and
after comparisons. (Refer to Section 4-3, Optics, for more information.)
The last two beam power monitor readings
The attenuator settings
Maximum laser power
Maximum attenuator
1999 Rev. F 4-43
4-5-5. AIQC Off Operation
!
Caution
Although AIQC OFF operation is described below, it is not an acceptable mode of operation. If AIQC
is off the system needs correction to bring AIQC back to an active state. Likely solutions are listed
below. (A more thorough list of solutions and troubleshooting methods is provided in the Error Code
QuickSheets.)
Initiate a calibrate sheet from the local panel.

Try a new cartridge (or lot) of film.
Check and if necessary adjust the densitometer.
Check and if necessary adjust drum temperature.
Check and if necessary replace the beam power monitor board.
Density of 1–16 Displayed when AIQC is Off

When the system operates in AIQC OFF mode, the Dmax value is no longer displayed on the keypads.
Instead a density value of 1–16 is displayed. (Density values are arbitrary and cannot be linked directly to
measured Dmax values.)
Dpatches Are No Longer Printed on Newly Queued Films

Dpatches are printed on any films queued while the system was in AIQC ACTIVE mode.
Dpatches are not printed on films queued while the system is in AIQC OFF mode.
The imager keeps track of which films have Dpatches.
The System Stays in AIQC OFF Mode Until:

1. A calibration sheet is initiated from the local panel and a successful calibration sequence occurs.
2. A cartridge is removed and reinserted, and the door is closed. When this occurs:
The cartridge bar code is read again.
The keypad display will change to AIQC ACTIVE as soon as the calibration sheet is picked up from the
cartridge. (Dmax will also display on the keypad Density/Contrast menu.)
AIQC ACTIVE will remain displayed until the calibrate sequence finishes.
If the calibrate sheet passes, the system stays in AIQC ACTIVE mode. If it fails, the system reverts to
AIQC OFF mode.
1999 Rev. F 4-44
4-6. Sensor/Interlock Trouble Analysis
4-6-1. Locations of Sensors

Refer to Figure 4-25 for locations of all sensors in the film path.
Densitometer
Sensor SW301
Exit Tray
Processor Sensor SW304
Entry Sensor Film Out
SW302 Sensor SW502
Double Feed (behind SW501)
Sensor
SW405 Picker Down
Sensor SW501
Torque
Depressor Picker Mid
Sensor SW406 Sensor SW504
Cartridge Door
Rollback
Interlock SW806
Home
Sensor
SW601 Picker Up
Sensor SW503
Mid Transport
Sensor Cartridge
SW404 Open Sensor
SW603
Cartridge
Present Rollback Rack
Sensor Sensor SW603
SW604
Platen
Exit Sensor Platen Bottom
SW403 Sensor SW701
Platen
Entry Sensor
SW402 8700–328A
Figure 4-25.
1999 Rev. F 4-45
4-6-2. Sensor Troubleshooting
Monitoring Sensors with the MPC

MPC/Diagnostics/SCB/Sensor will display the current status of most sensors. The sensor status screen is
updated every second.
Sensor Monitor Cable and Breakout Box

A Sensor Monitor Cable (78-8092-4170-2) and Test Data Tracker Label (78-8092-5445-7) can be obtained
by ordering the Sensor Monitor Kit (96-0000-0457-0). The Breakout Box can be obtained from your Field
Service Manager. They can be used to monitor all sensor feedback simultaneously. Refer to Figure 4-26 for
the test setup and Table 4-2 for the Data Tracker pin numbers and signal names. Sensor status is real time
and the LEDs on the breakout box show the status of the signals sent from the power distribution board to
the SCB. Sensor status can also be monitored with a meter or scope without the breakout box. Refer to
Measuring Sensor signals at the SCB 4-6-3.
SCB Breakout
Box
Sensor
Monitor
Power Sensors
Cable
Distribution
Board Sensors
Sensor harness
Sensors
8700–281L
Figure 4-26.
Breakout Box Setup:

Set all switches to the left (open) except the LED Common Switches located at the bottom of the
breakout box. Set these to the right.
Connect the adapter cable from the sensor harness to the breakout box. A lit LED (red) indicates a high
to the SCB. An off LED indicates a low.
If power to the sensor is OK (measured with the sensor disconnected), but the sensor does not change
states when actuated and deactuated, the sensor is bad.
Work Around: Substituting Sensors

For troubleshooting purposes, the filter present sensor can be substituted for any other “flag type” sensor
temporarily.
!
Caution
Any time a flag type connector is removed, the snap–on legs of the sensor can be rounded, resulting
in unreliable sensor mounting. If a flag type sensor is removed, it should be replaced.
Also, the picker mid sensor can be removed and substituted for another “U” type sensor temporarily. Once
power up is completed, the picker mid sensor can be removed and the DryView 8700/8500 will continue to
print normally.
1999 Rev. F 4-46
Sensor Disconnect Test

If you disconnect a sensor, the MPC or breakout box should show a high for the sensor signal (pull–up
resistor is on the SCB). If not, either the SCB is bad or there is a short in the wiring.
Sensor Ground Test (Refer to Figure 4-27.)

1. Disconnect the sensor and connect a jumper to pin 4.
2. Connect the other end of the jumper to machine ground.
!
Caution
If pin 5 (white) is shorted to ground, the 4 amp fuse F8E1 (pluggable) on the MIB will blow.
3. If MPC or the breakout box does not show a low, either the cable harness is bad (back to the SCB) or
the SCB is bad.
FLAG SENSOR: Short SCB line to machine “U” SENSOR: Short SCB line to machine ground.
ground. MPC or BOBOx should show low. MPC or BOBOx should show low.
5 5 White 5 5 +5v
Brown 4 4 To SCB Blue 4 4 To SCB
Black 3 3 Gnd Green 3 3 Gnd
Orange 2 2 +5v Red 2 2 +5v
Red 1 1 Gnd Black 1 1 Gnd
8700–282L
Figure 4-27.
Power Distribution Test Points

The power distribution board has test points that can be used to measure sensor signals. However, the
filter and back panel must be removed to access the test points.
4-6-3. Measuring Sensor Signals at the SCB
“U” Type Sensors

U Sensor blocked = Low to SCB (typically 53 mv).
U Sensor unblocked = High to SCB (typically 3.65 volts measured at breakout box post), 5.0 volts
without breakout box.
U Sensor open or disconnected = High at SCB (typically 2.75 volts measured at breakout box post, 5.0
volts without breakout box as measured at SCB sensor cable)
“Flag” Type Sensors

Flag Sensor blocked (deactuated) = High to SCB (typically 3.65 at breakout box, 5.0 volts at SCB
sensor cable).
Flag Sensor unblocked (actuated) = Low to SCB (typically 153 mv)
Flag Sensor open or disconnected = High at SCB (3.65 volts at breakout box, 5.0 volts without
breakout box)
1999 Rev. F 4-47
Making Sensor Measurements

With the sensor connected, measure the signal voltage at the SCB using a voltmeter or scope:
A high state should be 5.0 volts without the breakout box, or 3.65 volts with the breakout box attached.
If a high or low state is near threshold levels, the SCB may interpret the signal inconsistently.
Note
The SCB interprets all voltages above 2.2 volts to be high, and all voltages below 2.2 volts to be low.
A logic probe may also be connected to the service port pins. Refer to Figure 4-28.
Sensor Active States

The following table shows outputs of the sensors in the MPC “Checked” state:
8700/8500 Sensor Type Physical Logic State Svc Port Power Dist Bd
Assembly State Pin Test Pt (PDB)
Rollback Cart. Present U Blocked Low 13 TP8
Sw604
Rollback Rollback Home U Blocked Low 14 TP9
SW601
Rollback Cartridge Open U Blocked Low 17 TP11
SW603
Rollback Tongue U Blocked Low 19 TP13
Depress
SW406
Pickup Picker Up U Blocked Low 10 TP6
SW503
Pickup Picker Mid U Unblocked High 11 TP7
SW504
Pickup Picker Down U Blocked Low 8 TP4
SW501
Pickup Film Out U Actuated Low 9 TP5
SW502
Pickup Double Feed Flag Actuated Low 18 TP12
SW405
Exposure Platen Entry Flag Actuated Low 20 TP14
SW402
Exposure Platen Bottom U Blocked Low 21 TP15
SW701
Exposure Platen Exit Flag Actuated Low 22 TP16
SW403
Transport Mid Transport Flag Actuated Low 23 TP17
SW404
1999 Rev. F 4-48
8700/8500 Sensor Type Physical Logic State Svc Port Power Dist Bd
Assembly State Pin Test Pt (PDB)
Transport Processor Flag Actuated Low 24 TP18
Entry SW302
Transport Exit Tray U Actuated High 26 TP20
SW304
Filter Filter Present Flag Actuated Low 3 TP3
SW801
Figure 4-28.
1999 Rev. F 4-49
4-6-4. Sensor to SCB Schematic

Refer to Figure 4-29 for a functional illustration of a single sensor line (flag type).
With a flag–type sensor unblocked (actuated), the sensor collector shorts to ground and the SCB sees
a low.
Just the opposite is true for a U–type sensor. When the sensor is blocked, it conducts to ground and
the SCB sees a low.
If either type sensor is disconnected, the pull–up resistor on the SCB will cause the line to go high.
SCB 5vcc
RFI Filter 10K Digital

Logic
Circuits
Sensor 5vcc
signal to Ground
SCB
Breakout Box
472K
+5vcc
“Flag” Sensor
5 472K
4 Test LED
3 Post Common
2 Switch
1
Power
Distribution
8700–283L
Figure 4-29.
1999 Rev. F 4-50
4-6-5. Interlock Switches

The interlock switches in the DryView 8700/8500 are pulsed high and then low every second for safety
reasons. The following table explains the functionality:
SCB Sends to Interlock Switch SCB Interprets Output State of Switch

High High – Door Closed, Low = Door Open
Low High = Short, Low = Undefined
If the SCB sends out a low to an interlock switch and receives back a high:
An “interlock failed” error code, EC203 through EC206, will be logged after 1 second.
The watchdog timer circuit on the SCB will shut down the SCB after 8 seconds, turning off all motors,
heaters, local panel, communications, etc. The rotating segment display on the SCB will go blank.
Note
The watchdog timer circuit could also shut down the SCB if the CPU locked up and could not check
the interlocks every 8 seconds. (Refer to Section 4 for more information.)
There are pulldown resistors on the SCB for the interlock inputs. Therefore a low output to the interlock
with a low feedback is undefined.
Note
The service override interlock is a special case. Refer to EC203.
1999 Rev. F 4-51
4-7. Motor/Solenoid Trouble Analysis
4-7-1. Location of Motors

Refer to Figure 4-30 for locations of motors in the DryView 8700/8500.
Figure 4-30.
1999 Rev. F 4-52
4-7-2. Locations of Fuses and Motor/Solenoid Drivers on the MIB

For physical locations of the fuses and motor and solenoid drivers on the MIB, refer to Figure 4-31.
Troubleshooting Circuits with Soldered-in Fuses

If a fuse is blown on the MIB, jumper an external fuse across the open fuse for troubleshooting. When the
problem is fixed, install the new MIB.
A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
U2B1 Q5B1 U6B1 U8C1

Pickup Platen Feed Rollback
B Motor
Motor Kick Roll Motor
M501 solenoid M401 M601
C
F8D1
U2C1
U6D1 +5v
Transport
Processor 4 amp
D Motor
Motor fuse
M402 F8E1
M301 (plug in)
+5v
20 amp
E U6F1 to IPB
U2E1 solder F8G2 F8G2
Exit Processor
Motor fuse +17v -17v
Motor 4 amp 4 amp
M303 M301
F solder solder
fuse fuse
U5G1
Q1G1 Y401 - Tongue Dep. Sol.
G Y402 - U2G1
Platen Y701 - Platen Sol
Transport Y702 - Platen Align sol U6G1 -
Fd Roll Motor Optics Attenuator
M403 A
solenoid Motor
H
U4H1 U5H1 F8J1
Y704 - Plat Align Sol C K801 - Processor Power Relay +5v
J Y801 - Cart Dr Sol Y403 - Transport Gate Sol 4 amp
Y501 - Vacuum Valve Y705 - Platen Alignment solder to
Solenoid
Y703 - Platen Align Sol optics fuse
F7J1
K +24v
K5I1 - Laser 12 amp
Power Relay plug in
fuse for
solenoids
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8700–284L
Figure 4-31. MIB Component Layout Diagram

1999 Rev. F 4-53
4-7-3. Motor Troubleshooting

MPC/Diag/SCB/Motors will enable each of the motors for 10 seconds:
The motor enable signals from the SCB to the MIB can be monitored at the service port between the
SCB and MIB. The motor enable signals are high when the motor is enabled.
The MIB outputs a 24 volt, 50% duty cycle signal to the motor. Refer to Figure 4-32. The signal can be
viewed at the MIB test points.
Figure 4-32.
Isolating a Faulty Motor

There are two types of motors in the DryView 8700/8500:
Six–lead motors: These include the processor drive and pickup motors. These motors are
interchangeable.
Eight–lead motors: All other motors are of this type. They are interchangeable.
As a troubleshooting method, you can swap motors and see if the MIB can drive a known good motor
consistently. You can also check the motor windings for resistance comparisons or shorts to ground. Rotate
the motor to different positions while making the checks.
1999 Rev. F 4-54
4-7-4. Locations of Solenoids

Refer to Figure 4-33 for locations of solenoids in the DryView 8700/8500.
Figure 4-33.
1999 Rev. F 4-55
4-7-5. Solenoid Troubleshooting

To test the solenoids in the DryView 8700/8500, use MPC/Diag/SCB/Solenoids. The solenoids will be
actuated for 5 seconds.
The solenoid test points on the MIB can be monitored while you are doing a flex test of cables, to check
if anything in the circuit wiring is marginal or bad.
Logic control from the SCB to the MIB can be monitored via the service port on the SCB to MIB cable.
Refer to the schematic for pinouts.
!
Caution
Do not leave the solenoid actuated longer than the maximum actuation time indicated in the table.
8700/8500 Assembly Solenoid MIB Resistor Max. Actuation Time

Film Pickup Vacuum R4J5 Continuous duty
Film Pickup Tongue Depressor R4J6 20 seconds. Has 1
second startup voltage
followed by 10 volt hold
voltage. Transport Latch
Sw407 is in line with this
solenoid.
Transport Feed RI10 20 seconds
Problem: Some early
DryView 8700/8500s
had a weak, intermittent
solenoid (part 9532
197388–01).
Solution: Replace.
Transport Gate R5J3 20 seconds
Optics Platen Platen Top R5J2 30 seconds*
Optics Platen Platen Align A R5J1 30 seconds*
Optics Platen Platen Align B R4J12 30 seconds*
Optics Platen Platen Align C R4J11 30 seconds*
Optics Platen Platen Align D R4J10 30 seconds*
Optics Platen Platen Kicker R4J9 20 seconds
Door Release Supply Door R4J7 20 seconds
Door Release Left Door R4J4 20 seconds
* If the platen hold and align solenoids are tested repeatedly, they may get hot and fail to actuate. Any
testing should allow time for them to cool between testing.
1999 Rev. F 4-56
4-8. Film Sequencing
4-8-1. Load Cartridge Sequence

Refer to Figure 4-34 for a flowchart of the cartridge load process.
Figure 4-34.
1999 Rev. F 4-57
4-8-2. Open Cartridge Lid

Refer to Figure 4-35 for a flowchart of the cartridge lid opening process.
Figure 4-35.
1999 Rev. F 4-58
4-8-3. Read Bar Code

Refer to Figure 4-36 for a flow chart of the bar code read process.
Figure 4-36.
1999 Rev. F 4-59
4-8-4. Position Pickup Arm

Refer to Figure 4-37 for a flow chart of the pickup arm positioning process,
Figure 4-37.
1999 Rev. F 4-60
4-8-5. Pickup Film

Refer to Figure 4-38 for a flow chart of the film pickup process.
Figure 4-38.
1999 Rev. F 4-61
4-8-6. Move Film to Feed Position
Figure 4-39.
1999 Rev. F 4-62
4-8-7. Prepare to Feed Film
Figure 4-40.
1999 Rev. F 4-63
4-8-8. Feed Film to Platen Entrance
Figure 4-41.
1999 Rev. F 4-64
4-8-9. Close Out Pickup Cycle
Figure 4-42.
1999 Rev. F 4-65
4-8-10. Load Film into Platen
Figure 4-43.
1999 Rev. F 4-66
4-8-11. Unload Exposed Film from Platen
Figure 4-44.
1999 Rev. F 4-67
4-8-12. Drive Film Up Through Transport
Figure 4-45.
1999 Rev. F 4-68
4-8-13. Drive Film Through Processor to Exit Tray
Figure 4-46.
1999 Rev. F 4-69
Table 4-2. Tracker Label
Data Tracker Signal Name

Pin #
1 GND
2 Pick Bot
3 Pick Mid
4 Pick Top
5 Cart Open
6 Roll Home
7 GND
8 Cart Pres
9 Tong Dep
10 Film Out
11 Dbl Feed
12 Exp Entr
13 Exp Bot
14 Exp Exit
15 Xport Mid
16 Proc Entr
17 Xport Exit
18 Filter Pres
19 Top In
20 Top Intlk
21 Front In
22 Front Intlk
23 Side In
24 Side Intlk
25 Proc Turn
1999 Rev. F 5-1

5-1. Image Processor Board (IPB)
5-1-1. IPB Component Replacement

Be sure to back up the system first and then restore the file after IPB replacement. (If the system cannot be
backed up, use the last stored backup on site.)
IPB NVRAM (U19 chip on IPB) SCB NVRAM

Proc Drum temp set points
IMS Comm Image Host System
AIQC Speed vary, idle btwn cal, . . .

EIB Config Clock
Error History Maintenance Port Prints, filter count, pickup arm

Config.
(MPC/Modem board) height, # of lines, . . .
8700–285L
Figure 5-1.
Note
The IPB NVRAM also contains the mapping for the bad blocks of the memory daughter boards.
If you replace a memory board that has many bad blocks, you must clear the IPB memory mapping
NVRAM, or the IPB will keep the same map for the new board you install. Also, if you install a new
IPB, you may want to check the memory after replacing.
– To check memory refer to Section 5-5-6 (Image Processing/Imaging Memory)
– To Clear IPB memory mapping: MPC/File/Restore on
c:\winmpc\CLBADBLK.IM
(EX.CLBADBLK.IM1 for slot 1)
1999 Rev. F 5-2
5-1-2. IPB Self-Test
Config. Switch
To reconfigure (to defaults) the IPB Output
Comm parameters (communication with
SCB) and MPC Maintenance Port
parameters:
1. Press both reset and config.
2. Release reset. DS1 Rx data DS2
3. Release config. when TDB DS5 from SCB.
goes out (or after 15 seconds).
Reset Switch
resets IPB.
IPB
TDB
U1 U2
DS5
U19
U3 U4
MPC Port
CN1101 3A
SCB Port
CN1102
Optics Port
U99 CN1106 (Power)
8700–286L
Figure 5-2.
IPB Self Test:

1. DS2 lights (RED), indicating the IPB is in the boot process.
2. DS2 goes out. When the boot process completes successfully (about one second after power up), DS2
goes out. If DS2 does not go out, check the following:
Voltages from MIB at CN1106.
Xilinx U99 eprom (programs IPB hardware).
Replace IPB.
1999 Rev. F 5-3
Software Bootup:
3A. As soon as the IPB hardware self-test passes (DS2 goes off):
The IPB does its software checks. It holds the RESET line to the TDB low to prevent the TDB from
booting. This causes DS5 on the TDB to be lit.
When the IPB completes its tests, it releases the TDB and the TDB starts its own test.
If the TDB self-test pases , DS5 goes out. If the TDB self-test fails, the TDB resets itself.
If the TDB cannot boot, DS5 will flash at about a one second rate.
3B. IPB program software is loaded. U1 and U2
3C.Operating system software is loaded. (U3 and U4 contain the beta tables, operating system,
and the density test pattern.)
5-1-3. IPB Initiates Communication with SCB

This sequence typically occurs about 6–8 seconds after powerup.
DS1 (green)
IPB
SCB Tx LED.
SCB
U19
S:0,P:0,Tx:SA
– MS=81
(supply remaining=81)
S:0,P:0,Rx:Y MS=81 by
– “by” (busy)
PW=2
– PW=2
(processor warming 2)
U99
8700–287L
Figure 5-3.
1. The IPB initiates communication with the SCB by sending out a request for status through IPB
Connector Cn1102.
2. The SCB responds.
3. SCB TX LED flashes.
4. Data is received by the IPB.
5. DS1 on the IPB (green) flashes on momentarily whenever data is received.
1999 Rev. F 5-4
IPB to SCB Communication Notes:

The IPB always makes the requests and the SCB responds. The SCB never requests information from
the IPB (or from the DryView 8800).
Communication from the IPB to SCB can be monitored by either of the following:
a. MPC/Monitor/Slot 0 shows the actual commands being transmitted and received by the IPB:
S:0,P:0,TX:SA
S:0,P:0,RX:Y MS=81 by PW=2
S:0,P:0,TX:SA
S:0,P:0,RX:Y MS=81 NR AO
b. MPC/Diagnostics/SCB/Status shows the MPC interpretation of the commands:
Printer is busy (By)
Processor is warming (PW=2)
(MS=81 is the sheets remaining in the cartridge. STATUS does not
show this in its display.)
For a list of IPB/SCB commands refer to Section 4-1-5.
The IPB polls the SCB every 2 seconds on a continual basis. If the SCB does not receive a command
from the IPB within 45 seconds, it will declare EC910-Printer Malfunction. Note that the error is
declared by the SCB, but the SCB cannot report it to the IPB because of the communication
breakdown. Thus EC910 is not reported in the IPB’s error log. Refer to EC910 QuickSheet for more
information.
5-1-4. Keypads Request Status
IPB DS1
969 Keypad
TDB UKEIB STA
RCV
STA
STA . . . . . . .
DS5
8700–288L
Figure 5-4.
1. The 969 keypad transmits status request to the IPB every two to three seconds.
2. UKEIB RCV LED flashes when it receives data from the keypad.
3. DS1 flashes on (green) when data is received from the UKEIB.
4. During power up, no response is made to the keypad (TDB DS5 is lit during IPB powerup.)
1999 Rev. F 5-5
5-1-5. IPB Resets Keypads

IPB DS1
969 Keypad
TDB UKEIB RCV STA
XMIT RESET
Keypad
RESET=AST
line 478
Status Tracker cxxx
......
Keypad Initialization
Start
Storing density
patch . . . . . .
8700–289L
Figure 5-5.
1. Status requested by keypad.

2. UKEIB RCV LED flashes when it receives data from the keypad.
3. DS1 on the TDB flashes on (green) when it receives data from the UKEIB.
4. When the IPB and TDB complete their self tests, the IPB replies to the 969 Keypad with a RESET
command.
5. UKEIB XMIT LED flashes as it relays the IPB command.
6. RESET command causes the keypad to do a reset.
Note
Keypad reset typically occurs about 6-7 seconds after TDB self-test completes.)
5-1-6. IPB Resets FIB, then Downloads Parameters to EIB’s

At power up, the IPB holds a reset line low to the FIB. The FIB RESET LED lights.
The IPB then downloads parameters to the EIB’s. The ENABLE LED on the EIB/IB should light.
Example: The DEIB/DIB ENABLE LED lights, indicating it has a valid parameter set. The Port 0 (or
1) LED also lights.
Power Enable Xmt Port 1 Port 0
DEIB
Port 0 Port 1
8700–290L
Figure 5-6.
ERROR STATE: If the IPB does not receive acknowledgement from the EIB/IB that it successfully
received the parameter set, EC39 will be logged. Refer to EC39.
1999 Rev. F 5-6
5-2. HQ Keypad
5-2-1. HQ Keypad Notes

NVRAM stores: Print count, last format used, and all other screen values that can be changed by the
user.
The timeout for a command is over two minutes due to worst case response time of the IMS. This may
make the keypad look like it has hung.
1999 Rev. F 5-7
5-2-2. HQ Keypad Power up Communications Log
TDB Debug not shown. Refer to

IPB TDB Comm for more details. HQ Keypad
S:1,P:0,Rx:SHOW RELEASE
S:1,P:0,Tx:Show Y Release=1.2
Keypad requests information from IPB and displays
S:1,P:0,Rx:SHOW SYSTEM on keypad screen.
S:1,P:0,Tx:Show Y System=LT,B&W
S:1,P:0,Rx:STA PR=1
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y LT 125 Media=BWDryB, Status printer 1.
E14x17 Cover Open Busy
S:1,P:0,Rx:STA PR=2 Status printer 2? No printer 2 on this machine.

S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y No PR
S:1,P:0, Rx:STA FP=1 FP Film Processor 1 is ready.

S:1, P:0,Tx:Sta Y Ready LT
S:1,P:0,Rx:STA FP=2
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y No FP
“Delete Deferred all” deletes all formats and images
after they have printed. Ex. Keypad is disconnected
while prints are still queued and a partially acquire if
S:1,P:0,Rx:DEL DEF ALL left unqueued. DEL DEF will delete the partially
S:1,P:0,Tx:Del Y acquired page, and will delete the queued prints after
they are done printing.
Acquire timeout. Keypad will wait for acquire to

S:1,P:0,Rx:SHOW ACQTO succeed.
S:1,P:0,Tx:Show Y Acqto=10
Store Dpatch. Any prints the Keypad sends should

S:1,P:0,Rx:STO TEST=2049 DPATCH
have Dpatches on them.
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sto Y Size=280,23
S:1,P:0,Rx:STO ASC=2050 NVtext User ID.

S:1,P:1,Rx:Sta Pr=1
S:1,P:1,Tx:Sta Y LT 125 Media=
BWDryB,E14x17 Cover Open Busy
S:1,P:0,Rx:SET MEDIA=BWDRYB,E14x17
S:1,P:0,Tx:Set Y
S:1,P:0,SHOW MEDIA DMAX DENSITY CON Keypad uses status information from IPB to update
S:1,P:0,Tx:Show Y Con=7 Density=1 DMax=310 its NVRAM.
Media=BWDryB,E14x17,
4096,5337,310,4364,5337
S:1,P:0,Rx:SET DMAX=310
S:1,P:0,Tx:Set Y
8700–291L
1999 Rev. F 5-8
S:1,P:0,Rx:SET CON=7
S:1,P:0,Tx:Set Y
S:1,P:0,Rx:DEL FMT=ALL Delete all formats.

S:1,P:0,Tx:Del Y
S:1.P:0,Rx:SET MEDIA=BWGEN,E14x17
S:1,P:0,Tx:Set Y
S:1,P:0,Rx:SHOW MEDIA
S:1,P:0,Tx:Show Y Media=BWGen,E14x17, Media coordinates are requested by the keypad.
4096,5337,0,4364,5337 4096 image pixels x 5337 lines
4364 pixels (image and between image pixels)
S:1,P:0, Rx:DEL FMT=9 5337 lines. The keypad uses these numbers to
S:1, P:0,Tx:Del N BadVal=Fmt,9 calculate formats as shown in the following BOX
statements.
S:1,P:0,Rx:FMT ID=9 MEDIA=BWGEN,
E14x17
S:1,P:0,Tx:Fmt Y
S:1,P:0,Rx:BOX ID=1 FMT=9 LOC=112,119

SIZE=1024,1024
S:1,P:0,Tx:Box Y
S:1,P:0,Rx:BOX ID=1 FMT=9 LOC=112,119 Keypad downloads last used format setup to IPB.
SIZE=1024,1024 In this case it is a 20:1 format which is format #9.
S:1,P:0,Tx:Box Y Location and size coordinates are the same as a
custom format setup.
(etc . . . . . with BOX ID’s)
S:1,P:0,Rx:BOX ID=20 FMT=9 LOC=3223,

4303 SIZE=1024,1024
S:1,P:0,Tx:Box Y
S:1,P:0,Rx:BOX ID=100 FMT=9 LOC=0,0 Last box is the user ID area.

SIZE=840,103 BETA=0,0 CON=31
S:1,P:0,Tx:Box Y
S:1,P:0,Rx:SET BETA=2,2,2,2 Keypad sets interpolation to smooth.

S:1,P:0,Tx:Set Y
Keypad tries to set border (black or clear), but 8700
S:1,P:0,Rx:SET BORD=0
does not support the command.
S:1,P:0,Tx:Set N BadPar=Bord
S:1,P:1,Rx:SHOW MEM
S:1,P:1,Tx:Show Y Mem=32768,16828,4,6,16 Keypad requests memory remaining and displays
results. 32 Meg, 16 meg largest contiguous block,
4K holes, 6K bad, 16K used.
8700–292L
Figure 5-7.
1999 Rev. F 5-9
5-3. TDB Communications
5-3-1. TDB Theory
5-3-1-1. TDB Schematic (Copper) and Power up Notes
RS422 LED - Red

DS4 - Lit when RS422 lines
are receiving a valid idle
KEY
Jumper state from host, UKEIB, or
Rx data = solid line select fiber converter. When data
Tx data = dashed line Rx LED Green RS232 is sent they will flash off.
DS1 flashes on or
when data is RS422
IPB received.
TDB-Copper
Port 1
RS422/
Ttl Host
CPU
Converter
RS232
to Ttl
Converter
TX
TX
Converters
TX
Converters
RESET Line Converters
RS232/
Ttl
Converter Port 0
RS422
Host
to Ttl
Converter
TDB Reset LED Rx LED Green RS422 LED - Red

DS5 on during reset. DS2 flashes on DS3 - Lit when RS422 lines
Off when reset when data is are receiving a valid idle
completes. received. state from host, UKEIB, or
fiber converter. When data
is sent they will flash off.
8700–237L
Figure 5-8.
At power up the IPB holds the RESET line to the TDB low until the IPB passes its power up self-tests.
While the IPB is holding the RESET line low, DS5 on the TDB will be lit (red).
Once the IPB completes its self-tests, it causes the RESET line to the TDB to go high. The TDB now
starts its self-test. If the TDB self-test completes, DS5 goes out. If the TDB self-tests fails, DS5
continually repeats its self-test effort. DS5 will flash on and off at about a one second rate.
1999 Rev. F 5-10
The slide switch SW2 on the TDB copper board determines what voltages are sent out on pins5 and 9 of
the port.
Left position provides +5v and ground. Used for Fiber Optic Converter.
Right position provides ±12v to an DryView 8700/8500 keypad (DryView 8700/8500 keypad uses the
+12v only, not the minus) or a Hirschmann fiber converter (used with Siemens systems).
Center position provides CTS/RTS control between the TDB and host or keypad. (This is currently not
used by any hosts or keypads, but may be used in the future.)
5-3-1-2. Theory Introduction

The following examples have three columns that display what is happening from three different
communications points of view:
Image Processor Board (IPB) TDB Host Cable

MPC monitor mode. TDB debug mode. Data tap and
communications program.
IPB/MPC Key TDB Debug Port Key Data as seen on the host
side is displayed in data
S:0 = Comm to/from SCB LC = Keypad boxes.
S:1 = Comm to/from TDB (2) = Comm Port 2
P:0 = Comm port 0 to host << = TDB Sends
P:1 = Comm port 1 to host >> = TDB Receives
Rx = IPB has Rx’d data PK = HQ Keypad
Tx = IPB has Tx’d data DP = IPB
AN = Host
USP = Universal
8700–294L
Figure 5-9.
1999 Rev. F 5-11
5-3-1-3. TDB Transparent Mode Operation

For most users the TDB operates in Transparent mode, rejecting data only if there are parity errors. For
Siemens, the TDB operates in Translate mode and may reject commands (and may not pass them to the
IPB) for other reasons (such as bad values or invalid syntax).
Image Processor Board Translator Daughter Board Host or Keypad

(IPB) (TDB)
DS1
or
DS2
AN(2)>>aqu 1 AQU 1^m (Acquire)
S:1,P:1,Rx:AQU 1 DP(2)<<aqu 1
(8700 successfully
acquires the image . . . )
S:1,P:1,Tx:PAS DP(2)>>PAS
AN(2)<<PAS Port B ^fPAS^m
8700–295L
Figure 5-10.
1. The host sends a command.

2. DS1 (comm 0) or DS2 (comm 1) LED flashes on when data is received from the host.
3. TDB recovers command and forwards it.
4. IPB receives the data from the TDB.
5. IPB returns a reply.
6. TDB receives from IPB and transmits to the host.
7. Transmit port (fiber port B) flashes on (red) when the TDB transmits.
Note
This can be seen by cupping your hand over the port during transmit.
8. The ^f preceding each command is the ACKnowledge from the TDB. The ^m after each command is
the end of the message character. In this case the DryView 8700/8500 is saying:
Yes, I got your last command (^f).
And I have successfully completed the acquire (PAS), End of message (^m).
If the acquire had failed, the response would be: ^fFai,AQU^m
1999 Rev. F 5-12
5-3-1-4. TDB Translate Mode Operation (Siemens Acquire Sequence)

When the MPC Comm parameters are set to Siemens, the TDB translates the Siemens commands and
communicates with the IPB using the 969 command set.
IPB (MPC) TDB Debug Log Siemens
USP(1) >>101 Set contrast.
S:1,P:0,Rx:Set Con=4 DP(1) <<Set Con=10
S:1,P:0,Tx:Set Y DP(1)>>Set Y
USP(1) <<101 Contrast set reply.
USP(1)>>?r Camera ready?
USP(1)<< r Yes, camera is ready.
USP(1)>> E10 Expose film #1.
DP(1)<<Show Mem
S:1,P:0,Rx:Show Mem
DP(1)>>Show Y Mem=
32768,32736,1,0,32
S:1,P:0,Tx:Show Y Mem=. . .
DP(1)<<Set AcqTO=49
S:1,P:0,Rx:Set AcqTO=49
Dp(1)>>Set Y
S:1,P:0,Tx:Set Y
DP(1)<<Sto Img=44327
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sto Img=
40003 DP(1)>>Sto Y Size=
1024, 1024
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sto Y DP(1)<<Box ID=1
Fmt=40005 Modify
Size=1024 Size=1295,1295 Loc=167,115
S:1,P:0,Rx:Box ID =1 DP(1)>>Box Y
Fmt=40005 Modify
USP(1)<< j Expose completed.
S:1,P:0,Tx:Box Y
USP(1)>>?r Camera ready?
USP(1)<< r Yes, camera is ready.
USP(1)>>E20 Expose film #2.
8700–296L
Figure 5-11.
1999 Rev. F 5-13
5-3-1-5. TDB Rejects Data Due to Wrong Command Set in MPC
IPB TDB Host

DS1
or
DS2
AQ\^1
AN(2)>>
parity error.
Û
8700–297L
Figure 5-12.
1. The host sends data that is corrupted, or wrong parity, etc.

2. DS1 or DS2 LED flashes.
3. TDB receives data and detects a parity error.
4. No communication is passed to the IPB... MPC Monitor mode shows nothing.
5. Sometimes the TDB sends back a NAK (Hex 15, Not acknowledged) “Û” to host. Sometimes no
response is given.
Parity errors could occur because the IMS communication parameters (set in MPC) do not match the host
parameters. For example, the host is sending a word format of 8-e-1 and IMS Comm parameters (in MPC)
are set to something different.
In this case, the TDB was able to recognize the data, but detected a parity error. If the communication
parameters were too far different (wrong baud rate, etc.), the TDB would not be able to recognize the data
at all, and the TDB debug mode would show no data received.
1999 Rev. F 5-14
5-3-1-6. IPB Rejects Data Due to Wrong Command Set in MPC
IPB TDB Host
S:1,P:1,Rx:AQU 1 AQU 1 ^m
TDB passes
(IPB rejects command.
command)
S:1,P:1,Tx:AQU N ^fAqu N
Unknown Cmd UnknownCmd^m
8700–298L
Figure 5-13.
1. The host sends AQU1 (which is a valid 959 command).

2. TDB passes the command to the IPB.
3. The IPB is configured to 969 command set (via MPC Comm parameters) and rejects the command as
unknown. (AQU is not in the 969 command set.)
IPB TDB Host
S:1,P:1,Rx:Set con=4 Set con=4^m
S:1,P:1,Tx:INV,Set con=4 ^fINV, Set con=4^m
8700–299L
Figure 5-14.
This example shows a valid 969 command (set con=4) being sent to an IPB that is configured to 959
command set. (Set con is not in the 959 command set.)
Failed Communications Due to Bad Values

The IPB will also reject commands that have bad values or are incorrect such as:
969 Command Set:
S:1,P:1,RX:Set con=999–––––––––––––––––––––––––set con=999^m
S:1,P:1,TX:Set N BadVal=Con,999––––––fSet N BadVal=Con,999^m
(Set CONtrast=999 is outside the acceptable range of contrast selection)
959 Command Set:
S:1,P:1,RX:AQU,0 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––AQU,0^m
S:1,P:1,TX:INV,AQU,0 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––^fINV,AQU,0^m
(0 is an invalid AQUire parameter)
1999 Rev. F 5-15
Invalid or bad data can be caused by:

Data bits, stop bits or parity in MPC does not match host.
Host is sending wrong data.
5-3-1-7. RS422 Theory
TDB Copper Receiver Port
RS422 idle state, DS1 off (no data being transmitted)

the Tx lines are in one unchanging state. DS1 is off. (If RS422 Data Transmission, DS1 flashes on: the
the host is not providing a low on pin 2, DS1 will be on RS422 lines reverse polarity for each bit, causing DS1
continually through a pull up resistor.) (or DS2) to flash on and off.
TDB Copper RS422 receive lines TDB Copper RS422 receive lines
(Idle State) (Data Transfer)
DS1 is
off.
TDB UKEIB TDB Tx 0v UKEIB
Tx +3.4V
(Pin 7) or Host (Pin 7) or Host
DS1
lights.
Tx 0v Tx 3.4v
(Pin 2) (Pin 2)
Pull up Pull up
resistor to resistor to
+5v. +5v.
8700–300L
Figure 5-15.
TDB Fiber Receive Port

Idle State: The UKEIB transmits light to the TDB A port, over fiber A. DS1 is off. (If the UKEIB is not
supplying a light on fiber A, DS1 will be on constantly.)
Data Transfer: The fiber optic light is turned off and on. DS1 turns on and off.
1999 Rev. F 5-16
5-3-1-8. RS232 Theory
RS232 Host adapter

TDB
cable (Host to UKEIB)
Part #78-8071-8331-0
Host
Rx
+3v to +15v = high 25 Pin 9 Pin
Data 3
-3v to -15v = low 2 4 Tx
Tx
Data 2 3 6 Rx
7 1 GND
Rx LED DS0 (or DS1):
DSR (Data Set Ready) 6 - Is lit with no cables
connected to the comm
DCD (Data Carrier Detect) 8 port.
Data - When a cable is
Terminal 20 connected and
Ready the host is holding
RQS its Tx line in an
(Request 4 idle state (no data
to send) being sent) (low),
CTS (Clear to Send) 5 DS0 should be off.
It will flash on when data
Optional lines - not is transmitted.
used by all host.
8700–301L
Figure 5-16.
1999 Rev. F 5-17
5-3-2. Setup/Cabling
5-3-2-1. MPC Monitor Setup

Do not connect the MPC monitor cable to the Comm ports of the TDB. It will damage the TDB.
Connect the 9-pin cable from your PC’s serial port to the MPC port on the DryView 8700/8500. (Any
9-pin straight-through cable will work.)
Normal baud rate in MPC/Operations/Preference is 19200. If you cannot connect at this baud rate,
reconfigure the IPB to factory default baud rate (19200) by pressing and holding the RESET and
CONFIG buttons, release the RESET button, then hold the CONFIG button until the TDB red LED DS5
goes blank.
TDB
MPC
NO!!
MPC
YES!
8700–302L
Figure 5-17.
1999 Rev. F 5-18
5-3-2-2. RS232 or RS422 Monitoring of Host Communications to the TDB
Note
For a tutorial on monitoring host communications refer to the Laser Communications video part
#78-6970-6715-1.
RS232 Communications
Install the Data Tap into the RS232 line.
Install a null modem cable (such as the LaserMS cable) on to the PC tap connector of the data tap and
connect the 9 pin end to your PC.
Close switches 1, 2, and 3 of the Data Tap.
Prepare the software to connect and capture the data.
RS422 Communications
The monitor box does not work with the DryView 8700/8500.
Try the RS422 loopback test or use the TDB Debug port. (Refer to 3-3-6).
Communications Software Setup

If using a communications software package (e.g., Crosstalk or Procomm), set comm=1 (serial port)
and set parameters to match the host (baud rate, data bits, stop bits and parity).
Set: Local – ON
Terminal – TTY
Echo – ON
Carriage Return = Carriage return plus line feed.
5-3-2-3. TDB Debug Setup
TDB
Direct Connect
J3 J3
TDB Adapter Cable
78-8092-4180-1 PC
12
Red stripe on top Straight through cable
Debug adapter to com 1 port of PC. 2 34
cable
3 56
78
9 10
W7 - Jumpers on TDB
must be set as shown.
8700–303L
Figure 5-18.
1999 Rev. F 5-19
PC Communications setup – Port 1, 19200, 8-n-1

Press RETURN and the following menu should appear:
Debug Menu
1. Change Debug Level
2. Turn all Debug levels off
3. Print NV configuration data
99. Exit Debut Menu
Enter Selection: 1
Select a debug level
1. low
2. medium
3. high
4. off
99. Quit
Enter Debug Level Selection 1
Select a port
1. Port 0
2. Port 1
3. Both ports
99. Quit
Enter Port Selection: 3
Select a module
1. System Executive
2. Host Driver
3. Host Interpreter
4. Laser Imager Interpreter
5. Laser Imager Driver
6. All modules
99. Quit
Enter Module Selection: 6
1999 Rev. F 5-20
5-3-2-4. Interpreting the TDB Debug Port

The following example shows the logs of a failed acquire sequence between an DryView 8700/8500
keypad the the TDB/IPB.
TDB Debug Port Key

LC = 8700/8500 Keypad
(2)= comm port 2
<<=TDB Sends
>>=TDB Receives
PK=HQ keypad
DP=Laser Imager
AN=host
USP=Universal Siemens Protocol
MPC Monitor Display TDB Debug Display Keypad Display or Action
LC(2) <<S Y Supply Low Keypad displays “Supply Low.”

LC(2) <<S Y Ready Keypad displays “Ready.”
LC(2) >> A Keypad Acquire button is pressed.
8700 IPB receives the LC(2) <<SfS Keypad receives Acknowledge.
Store image command. LC(2)<<SY# Acquiring 1 of 1 Keypad displays “Acquiring 1 of 1.”
S:1,P:1,Rx:Sto Img=4004 DP(2) <<Sto Img=40004

LC(2) <<SY Supply Low
8700 IPB transmits a LC(2) <<SY Ready
timeout to the TDB. LC(2) <<SY Supply Low
DP(2) >>Sto N TimeOut Keypad screen is cleared of status
S:1,P;1,Tx:Sto N Time Out LC(2) <<S Y”%1/1 messages.
LC(2) <<SY# -
LC(2) << Keypad displays “Ready”
LC(2) << “Acquire Failure 68”
LC(2) <<SY Ready “Supply Low”
LC(2) <<SY Acquire Failure
- 68
LC(2) <<SY Supply Low
DP(2) <<Sta Keypad displays “Ready.”
S:1,P:1,Rx:Sta DP(2) >>Sta Y
S:1,P:1,Tx:Sta Y LC(2) <<SY Ready “Acquire Failure 68”
8700–304L
Figure 5-19.
1999 Rev. F 5-21
5-3-2-5. RS232 Host Adapter Cable and Data Tap Cable Pinouts
TDB
RS232 Host adapter
cable (Host to UKEIB)
Data Tap Part# 78-8071-8331-0
25 Pin 9 Pin
Host 2
3 4 Tx
3 6 Rx
2
7 1 GND
6
8
1 2 3 4 20
4
Data Tap 5
Switch 1 2 3 4
RS232
Null Modem Cable
(Laser MS Cable) PC Rx 3 Tx 2
8700–305L
Figure 5-20.
5-3-2-6. Using Your PC to Send Commands to the DryView 8700/8500 or UKEIB
RS232
Set TDB jumpers to RS232 for the port to which you are connecting. Set slide switch to middle or left.
UKEIB - Set dip switch for HOST 232
Connect a Null Modem 9 to 25 pin cable from your PC serial port to the TDB 25 pin adapter cable
TDB Comm 25 Pin 25 Pin Laser

Port (or MS (Null PC Serial
9 Pin Modem) 9 Pin
UKEIB Host Port
Port) Cable
Part #78-8071-8331-0
(RS232 to UKEIB or TDB Cable) 8700–306L
Figure 5-21.
Set IMS comm parameters in MPC to 959 defaults and power cycle the DryView 8700/8500.
Set PC communication software parameters to 1200 baud, 8-e-1.
Type the following while connected with your communication software:
831/952/959 Command Set

RQS. The IPB should respond with STA,1,Rdy if the DryView 8700/8500 is ready and has no alarms
on the local panel.
1999 Rev. F 5-22
RLC (read last contrast). The IPB should return LCS,x (Last Contrast Set to x, where x=the contrast
the user is currently set to as displayed on the local panel.
969 Command Set

Set con=4. The contrast on the local panel should change to 4.
Siemens – No method setup to duplicate Siemens protocol.
5-3-3. Monitor Examples
5-3-3-1. Monitor Introduction and Overview

The following monitor examples are meant to give a general look at communications in a variety of
situations. They are not meant to describe all the details or pitfalls of communication between hosts and
lasers. For more information on host commands and laser responses, refer to the Interpreting Commands
5-3-4.
Translate Mode:
Siemens language requires translation by the TDB, therefore the TDB operates in Translate mode
when configured for Siemens.
The DryView 8700/8500 Keypad is a dumb keypad, therefore the TDB has to translate its simple
command structure to 969 command set. The TDB operates in Translate mode when setup for
DryView 8700/8500 keypad.
Transparent Mode:
Hosts use 959 command set. Therefore the TDB operates in Transparent mode (passing command
with no translation) when it is configured for 959 command set.
The HQ Keypad is an intelligent keypad. Therefore the TDB operates in Transparent mode (passing
commands with no translation) when it is configured for 969 command set.
Format Setup...1:1,6:1, etc.
The IPB needs the communicating device to tell it how to format a page (1:1, 6:1 format etc..) The
different communicating devices do it as follows:
– Siemens. When the TDB is configured to Siemens, the TDB will download format information to the
IPB at power up. Siemens will tell the TDB what format it wants to acquire and where to print the
image, but the TDB has done the work of setting up the size and locations of each frame on a page.
Example:
S:1,P:1,RX:Box Id=1 Fmt=40005 Loc=132,115 Size=1365,1295
The box defined by the TDB is similar to a Keypad Custom Format file that a technician can
make using the Keypad Format file procedure (refer to the 969 Service Manual).
– DryView 8700/8500 Keypad. The TDB again does the work of defining formats and boxes.
– HQ Keypad. The HQ Keypad is an intelligent device, and it defines the formats and boxes. For
details on HQ Keypad communication, refer to the HQ Keypad System Theory of Operation 5-3-4-2.
– Host. The host defines the zones using the DZO command. Refer to the 959 command set later in
this document.
5-3-3-2. TDB Power Up Sequence (DryView 8700/8500 Keypad)

The first five lines of this sequence capture the uploading of formats from the TDB to the IPB at powerup.
The uploading lasts for about one minute and only the first few lines are shown here. If either port of the
TDB is configured to DryView 8700/8500 keypad or Siemens, the TDB will upload film formats to the IPB
at power up as illustrated in the first 5 lines in the following example.
1999 Rev. F 5-23
MPC Monitor Log TDB Debug Mode 8700 Keypad
S:1,P:1,Rx:Fmt ID=40005 DP(2) <<Fmt ID=40005

S:1,P:1,Tx:Fmt Y DP(2) >>Fmt Y
Keypad is not
S:1,P:1,Rx:Box ID=Fmt=40005LOC=132,115 DP(2) <<Box ID=1
receiving any data
Size=1365,1295 Fmt=40005
from IPB and it
S:1,P:1,Tx:Box Y LOC=132,115
displays “BUSY.”
S Size=1365,1295
S DP(2) >>Box Y
S S
S S
S (TDB Debug information
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sto Test=40001 DPATCH
S continues for about 1 minute
but is not displayed in the rest
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sto Asc=40002 NVText
of this illustration.)
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sta
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y FP=1 IMS Pr=1
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sta Pr=1 TDB is operating in
Translate Mode. Text
For the first time,
is not shown in this
the 8700 keypad
illustration.
displays the print
count, and any
status messages.
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y LT 125 Media=BWDryB,
Before this time it
E14x17 NoCass CoverOpen Busy
only displays
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sta Pr=1
“BUSY.”
E14x17 NoCass CoverOpen Busy
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sta FP=1 Keypad displays “2
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y Warming=2 LT minutes till
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sta warmup.”
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y IMS
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sta IMS
DS1 flashes.
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y Reset
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sta Pr=1
E14x17 NoCass CoverOpen Busy Format key 2:1 is
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sta Pr=1 TDB receives format pressed.
request and
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y LT 45 Media=BWDryB,E14x17 downloads format. New format displays
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sta Pr=1 on keypad.
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y LT 45 Media=BWDryB,E14x17
Acquire key
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sto Img=40011
pressed on
keypad.
S:1,P:0,Rx:Box ID=1 Fmt=40002 Modify
Size=2048,1973 LOC=132,430 Acquired row field
S:1,P:0,Tx:Box Y adds an “X” on
keypad.
S:1,P:0,Rx:DEL DEF IMG=40012
S:1,P:0,Tx:Del Y Erase image
selected on keypad.
8700–307L
Figure 5-22.
1999 Rev. F 5-24
5-3-3-3. TDB Power Up Sequence (DryView 8700/8500 Keypad and Host)

In this example, P:1 (port 1) is highlighted. P:1 is a host user configured to 959 command set and P:0 is
configured to the DryView 8700/8500 keypad.
IPB (MPC Monitor Capture) TDB Host Comm

Capture Log
The ALM,0 (not ready) is

transmitted to the Host by the
IPB before MPC Monitor ALM,0^m
mode is turned on by the IPB.
During power up the IPB sends commands to the modem, and these are Host sends a
sometimes seen during a monitor of a power up sequence. For illustration “Clear Alarm”
purposes, modem commands are in brackets { }. to 8700.
S:1,P:1,Rx:CLA ^fCLA^m
S:1,P:1,Tx:PAS ^fPAS^m
S:1,P:0,Rx:Fmt ID=40003 TDB uploads format 4003
S:1,P:0,Tx:Fmt Y setup to the TDB.
S:1,P:1,Tx:ARS ^fARS^m
S:1,P:0,Rx:Box ID=1 Fmt=40003 LOC=132,115 Define size of box 1 of
Size=2048,1731 format 40003:
S:1,P:0,Tx:Box Y S Box 2
{A}S:1,P:0,Rx:Box ID=2 Fmt=40003 LOC=2193,115 S etc. . . 8700 transmits
Size=2048,1731
“Pass” I got the
{TE}S:1,P:0,Tx:Box Y
CLA command .
{O}S:1,P:0,Tx:Box Y
S:1,P:0,Rx:Box ID=1 Fmt=4004 LOC=1133,115 . . and “Alarm
Setup next format, Reset.”
Size=1120,1407
S:1,P:0,Tx:Box Y etc. . .
The uploading of formats from the

S
TDB to the IPB continues for
S
about 1 minute.
S
S
8700–308L
Figure 5-23.
1999 Rev. F 5-25
5-3-3-4. Idle Sequence (DryView 8700/8500 Keypad and Siemens)

This sequence (idle chatter) between the TDB and IPB (and the TDB to DryView 8700/8500 keypad)
occurs approximately every 15 seconds if either comm port is set to DryView 8700/8500 or Siemens
protocol. Idle chatter occurs only when there are not commands from the host. The following idle chatter is
to a DryView 8700/8500 keypad (LC) and happens to be occurring while the DryView 8700/8500 is
warming up.
No communications is passed to host during IPB to TDB idle chatter.
IPB (MPC Monitor Capture) TDB
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sta Pr=1 DP(2) <<Sta Pr=1

S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y LT5 DP(2) >>Sta Y LT 5
Media=BWDryB,E14x17 Media=BWDryB,E14x17
Media Low Busy Media Low Busy Host and Keypad
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sta Pr=1 DP(2) <<Sta Pr=1
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y LT5 DP(2) >>Sta Y LT 5
Media=BWDryB,E14x17 Media=BWDryB,E14x17 Keypad will display
Media Low Busy Media Low Busy current status of the
LC(2) <<!%5 machine.
LC(2) <<Warming 1 minutes
LC(2) << Supply Low
LC(2) << Busy
LC(2) << Warming 1 minutes
LC(2) << Supply Low
LC(2) << Busy
8700–309L
Figure 5-24.
1999 Rev. F 5-26
5-3-3-5. Acquire and Print Sequence (952 Host)
IPB/MPC Host
For interpretation of
S:1,P:1,Rx:AQU 1 the print commands AQU 1 ^m Acquire first image.
S:1,P:1,Tx:PAS see paragraph ^fPAS^m
S:1,P:1,Rx:AQU 2 5-3-4-2. ^fAQU 2 ^m
S:1,P:1,Rx:AQU 3 ^fAQU 3 ^m
S:1,P:1,Rx:RQS ^fAQU 5 ^m
S:1,P:1,Tx:STA, 1,RDY ^fPAS^m
S:1,P:1,Rx:RQS ^fSTA, 1,RDY^m
S:1,P:1,Tx:STA, 1,RDY
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sta Pr=1 P:0 is a keypad
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y LT 32 requesting status. ^fRLD^m Read last density.
Media=BWDryB,E14x17 ^fLDS,13^m
S:1,P:0,Rx:Sta Pr=1 ^fRLC^m
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y LT 32 ^fLCS,5^m Read last contrast.
Media=BWDryB,E14x17
S;1,P:1,Rx:RLD ^fDZO 1200 60 3 0 0 HAA 1 5 2 5 3 5^m
S:1,P:1,Tx:LDS,13 ^fPAS^m
S:1,P:1,Rx:RLC ^fDZO 1200 60 3 0 0 HAA 5 5 5 B 5 B^m
S:1,P:1,Tx:LCS,5 ^fPAS^m
^fDZO 1200 60 3 0 0 HAA 5 B 5 B 5 B^m
S:1,P:1,Rx:DZO 1200 60 3 0 0 HAA ^fPAS^m
152535 ^fDZO 1200 60 3 0 0 HAA 5 B 5 B 5 B^m
S:1,P:1,Rx:DZO 1200 60 3 0 0 HAA Define Zone ^fCLA^m
3B3B3B Refer to 959 ^fPAS^m
S:1,P:1,Tx:PAS command set, ^fSTP,1,13^m
S:1,P:1,Rx:DZO 1200 60 3 0 0 HAA paragraph ^fSTC^m
3B3B3B 5-3-4-2. ÊXP^m
S:1,P:1,Tx:PAS ^fEOE^m
S:1,P:1,Rx:DZO 1200 60 3 0 0 HAA ^fPTC^m
3B3B3B ^fCMI 1 2 3 5 ^m
S:1,P:1,Rx:CLA STP ^f
S:1,P:1,Tx:PAS Set up to print, 1
S:1,P:1,Rx:STP,1,13 copy, density 13.
S:1,P:1,Tx:STC
S:1,P:1,Rx:EXP
S:1,P:1,Tx:EOE
S:1,P:1,Tx:PTC End of exposure.
S:1,P:1,Rx:CMI 1 2 3 4 5
S:1,P:1,Tx:PAS Clear memory images 1 2 3 4 5.
8700–310L
Figure 5-25.
1999 Rev. F 5-27
5-3-4. Interpreting Commands
5-3-4-1. Overview of Command Sets

At present the 969 command set is used only by Imation keypads and one or two hosts. Most host user
s use some form of 959 command set.
Siemens command set consists of Siemens specific language as illustrated in the Siemens command
set section.
5-3-4-2. 959 Command Set
Laser Imager Plus Commands: Command Summary

The following is a summary of commands that can be sent to the laser imager. A summary of unsolicited
responses the laser imager can send at any time is included. In the summary, the symbol <> is used to
enclose mandatory operands and the symbol () are used to enclose operands that are optional.
Table 5-1. Memory Management Commands
Command Operands Meaning

INQ Inquire available memory
CLR <image> Clear image
CMI <image><image> Clear multiple images
Acquisition Setup Commands

MCH <type#>,<interface> Set parameters from machine
type EPROM.
Acquisition Commands

AAI <see description> Acquire ascii image
AQU <image #> Acquire image
Print Setup Commands

SBD <border> Set border
DZO <see description> Define zone
WCT <see description> Define contrast table
1999 Rev. F 5-28
Print Commands

STP <copies><density> Print film
CNT <image #> Contrast test
DNT Density test
Request Status Commands

RQS Request status
Parameter Commands

ISZ <image #> Request image size
RLC Read last contrast set
RLD Read last density set
SPN Store parameters in NVRAM
Alarm Clearing Commands

CLA Clear alarm
RES Reset laser imager
Responses the Laser Imager Can Send at any Time

ALM <alarm #> Alarm conditioned occurred
ARS Alarm condition reset
DCR (FLO) Decrement copy count
EOE End of exposure cycle
PTC Print completed
PTF (failed code) Print failed
STC Film staged and ready for
exposure
TOP Time out print requested
1999 Rev. F 5-29
Remote Interface Commands: Message Protocol

The laser imager plus protocol is identical to the laser imager one protocol. All message, either commands
or responses, follow the protocol shown below.
<MESSAGE>::=<OPCODE>*{<FIELD_SEPARATOR><OPERAND>}<EOM>
<EOM>::=<CR>I<LF>I<ETX>I<CR><LF>
<FIELD_SEPARATOR>::=+{’’I’,’}
In this notation, vertical bars, I are OR operators, ::= translates into “is defined as”, * means “zero or more
of”, and + means “one or more of”. Opcodes and operands are separated by one or more spaces or
commas. Commas and spaces are treated identically. Message length must be not more than 256
characters including the EOM character(s).
Example:
STA 6 PRI FLO MFL <CR>
All messages received by either the laser imager or remote must be acknowledged by the receiving device.
Possible responses are:
Acknowledge (ACK). Indicates that the receiving device got a properly framed message with no parity
errors.
No acknowledgement (NAK). Indicates that the receiving device got an improperly terminated message or
a parity error. The sending device will automatically retransmit the message up to three times before
quitting. Then the master (if functioning) places the printer in an alarm condition.
Should the sending device receive no answer from the receiving device, it stops transmitting after three
retransmissions. Then the master (if functioning) places the printer in an alarm condition.
During message transmission, any UART error or received illegal character will result in a NAK being sent
immediately by the receiver. The transmitting device will wait 500 msec before each retransmission after a
NAK. The receiving device should be prepared to accept a retry after 400 msec. The laser imager will wait
for 400 msec of inactivity on the communication interface before accepting the retransmission of
characters.
If the UART error occurs during the EOM sequence, the receiver may not recognize the EOM. A parity
error may not occur and the receiver will not respond with an ACK or NAK. If the sender does not receive
an ACK or NAK within 500 msec, the sender should resend EOM up to a maximum of three times, after
which an alarm condition will result.
1999 Rev. F 5-30
Define ZOne
Description:
This command is used to define a zone on a sheet of film. DZO commands must be sent prior to the STP
print film command. A maximum of 15 zones can be placed on a sheet of film. Images within a zone are
centered by the Imager. A maximum of 32 images can be placed on a film and a maximum of 16 different
contrast tables can be specified per film.
The DZO commands are used in the order that they are received. Zones are cleared by the laser imager
after a successful print. The CLZ command can be used to clear zones in reverse order and the ALI
command can be used to clear all zones at once.
Usage:
DZO LIN TOP TYP HMG VMG EMO [IID CTA..IID CTA]
Example:
The following example command is used to specify a top border of 10 lines, two images in the zone,
bottom border of 10 lines, horizontal magnification of 1.5, vertical magnification of 1.5, aspect ratio of 1:1,
replication mode enlargement, and the images to be printed in the zone are images 5 and 6, both with
contrast table 3.
DZO 532 10 2 1.5 0 HO5 3 HO6 3
Arguments:
LIN – Specifies the total number of lines in the zone in the range of 0 to 4800.
TOP – Specifies the number of lines of border at the top of the zone. The range of this argument is6 to
4096.
TVP – Specifies the number of images to be printed in the zone. The range is 0 to 4.
HMG – Specifies the horizontal magnification to be applied to the image(s). This argument may be in the
range of 1 to 64 and zero. If it is zero, then the laser imager calculates the magnification.
VMG – Specifies the vertical magnification to be applied to the image(s). This argument may be in the
range of 1 to 64 and zero. If it is zero then the laser imager calculates the magnification.
EMO – Specifies the horizontal and vertical enlargement mode to be used for the printing of image(s) in
this zone. When specified in hexadecimal, the horizontal mode is specified as the most significant digit and
the vertical mode is specified as the least significant digit. This argument may also be specified in decimal
by using the following formula.
EMO = (hmode*16) + vmode
If specified in hexadecimal, an H must precede the two hex digits. The enlargement modes may be in the
range of 0 to F. Where 0 is replication and 1 through F specify the preloaded table of coefficients to be
used for interpolation. The codes translate to the interpolation values given in the following table.
HEX Code Value
0 Replicate – LI one Sharp
1 5th order – LI one Smooth
2 3rd order
3 alpha = 0
4 alpha = –.25
5 alpha = –.5
6 alpha = –.75
1999 Rev. F 5-31
7 beta = .9
8 beta = 1.0
9 beta = 1.25
HEX Code Value
A beta = 1.5
B beta = 1.75
C beta = 2.0
D .2 x 5th + .8 x (beta = .7)
E .4 x 5th + .6 x (beta = .7)
F .6 x 5th + .4 x (beta = .7)
IID CTA – This argument pair contains two values, the first is the image ID (IID), the second is the contrast
table CTA). Image ID numbers may be in the range of 1 to 239, contrast table parameter can be numbers
in the range of 0 to 39 and D or B. Tables 1 through 15 are positive tables and correspond to 1 through 15
on the local panel. Tables 16 through 30 are negative (invert data) tables. Tables 0 and 31 are special
tables used to blank images. Table 0 maps all pixels of an image to clear (FFFh) and Table 31 maps all
pixels in an image to black (000h). Tables 32 through 39 are RAM tables that must be downloaded with the
WCT command. A ’D’ causes the Laser Imager Plus to use the values set at the local panel. A B causes
the laser Imager Plus to map all pixels to the border level (clear or dark).
Returns:
If successful: PAS
If unsuccessful: FAI,<code>, DZO,LIN,TOP,...
Command:
CLear Zone
Description:
This command is used to clear the zones defined by the DZO command. The zones can be cleared only in
the reverse order from which they were sent. Zones are cleared automatically after a successful print.
Note
The ALI command can be used to clear all zones at once.
Usage:
CLZ
Examples:
The clear the last zone.
CLZ
Returns:
If successful:
PAS
If unsuccessful:FAI, <code>,CLZ
1999 Rev. F 5-32
5-4. Digital Image Acquisition
5-4-1. The IPB Downloads Parameters to the DEIB/DIB during Power Up

The DEIB/DIB ENABLE led will light indicating that it has a valid parameter set.
The Port 0 (or 1) LED will also light.
The IPB will not download the parameters for that port again as long as acquires are successful.
DEIB
Port 0 Port 1
8700–311L
Figure 5-26.
ERROR STATE: If the IPB does not receive acknowledgement from the DEIB/DIB that it successfully
received the parameter set, EC39 will be logged. Refer to EC39.
ERROR STATE: If an acquire fails, EC64–68 will be logged, and the IPB will reload the parameters to the
DEIB/DIB on the next acquire after the first failed acquire.
5-4-2. DEIB/DIB Asserts the REQUEST Line High to the Host

When the Keypad Acquire button is pressed (or host “Acquire” command is received), the IPB
commands the DEIB/DIB to request the first line of data from the host. The DEIB/DIB does this by
asserting the REQUEST line high to the host.
Note
The DEIB XMT LED or DIB REQ LED goes on whenever the REQ line is asserted. However, it is only
a general indicator of the state of the REQUEST line.
DEIB
Port 0 Port 1
8700–312L
Figure 5-27.
1999 Rev. F 5-33
The REQUEST line to the host can be observed with a scope (or a logic probe) connected to the DEIB as
follows:
!
Caution
Be sure to power off the DEIB/DIB when connecting and disconnecting scope or logic probe.
Set scope to 2v, and approximately 1ms period.

Ground the scope and/or logic probe to pin 8. (Chassis ground does not give good results.)
U5 pin 2 or 3 (port 0) (pins 2 and 3 are opposite polarities.)
DIB:
U14 pin 5 and 6 – port 0
U14 pin 2 and 3 – port 1
Request Lines for Port 0 of DEIB – Scope Signals and Logic Probe States
Pin 2 Pin 3 Logic probe on pin2 in pulse mode.

Request Idle .8v–––––––– 4v–––––––––__ Low LED lit.
_
Request active, host 4v––––––––– .8v––––––––– High LED lit, Pulse LED off, Low LED
not responding. OFF.
Request line during 4v–––––––––_ .8v––––––––– High LED lit, Pulse LED lit, Low LED OFF.
Normal transmission
ERROR STATE: If the REQUEST line does not go high, either the IPB has not told the DEIB/DIB to request
data, or the DEIB/DIB is not functioning correctly.
1999 Rev. F 5-34
5-4-3. Host Responds to REQUEST by Asserting its STROBE Line High

When the host sees the REQUEST line high, it sets the data lines for the first message which contain the
image size data if in header mode (virtually all hosts use Header Line mode). The host then causes the
STROBE line to go high (telling the DEIB/DIB to read the data lines).
The STROBE signals from the host can be viewed with a scope connected to the DEIB at:
Set Scope to 2v, and approximately 1 us period.
DEIB or DIB Chip Non inverting input Inverting input Output

DEIB Port 0 U7 6 7 5
DEIB Port 1 U2 6 7 5
DIB Port 0 U24 1 2 7
DIB Port 1 U24 4 3 6
Output can be measured with a logic probe or scope. Logic probe supply leads to +5v and Ground.
– DEIB: Low state when idle (not transmitting data), and changes states during transmission.
– DIB: High when idle.
DEIB Port 0
+5v
U7
Output
Signals Strobe + 6
from
Host Strobe - 7
Gnd
8700–313L
Figure 5-28.
Input from Host. Scope only. Logic probe may give inconsistent results.
– Normal host Idle state DEIB (no data transmission) has the STROBE + low, STROBE high, and the
output low.
– Normal host Idle state for the DIB has the STROBE + low, STROBE – high, and the output high.
– Since the host is transmitting the STROBE signals, the voltage levels for the STROBE lines may
vary depending upon the length of the cable run, voltage output of the host, and the ground
reference of the host machine. However, the voltage difference between high and low lines must be
>.2v for the comparator circuit to operate properly.
– If the STROBE signal levels look incorrect, you may want to verify your process and setup by
measuring another DEIB at the site that is working, or by using a PC with a digital test board
installed (refer to 959TB/1–1/92) and make the same measurements.
1999 Rev. F 5-35
ERROR STATE: If the host does not cause the STROBE line to change states:
The host is not responding to the DEIB/DIB’s REQUEST
There is a bad cable between host and DEIB/DIB.
In normal image transfer there are many STROBE pulses. If only the header is being transmitted, and
not data, the pulses may appear as a single change of state using a scope (A logic probe a Pulse
option connected to U7 output does show these transitions nicely).
ERROR STATE: EC59 or 68 some revisions of SIEMENS camera boards tri-state their signals.
Tri-stating is the condition where the idle state of the Siemens STROBE signals are floated. Thus there
is no .2v or greater difference between the lines in the idle state (host is not sending data).
Some revisions of our DEIBS interpret this idle state floating as another pulse and the acquire fails.
The header data from Siemens may or may not be displayed in MPC/Image Show. Thus the only sure
way to know is it is a tri-stating problem is to measure the STROBE inputs from the host as mentioned
earlier in this step.
Solution: For new installations, when one of the above mentioned modalities is included in your site
plan, specify that a DEIB-T Kit be shipped (78-8079-0736-1) instead of the regular DEIB Kit. The
service part version of the kit is 78-8079-0737-9. Order this part only if you are getting EC59 or EC68,
and you know the modality is providing a tri-stated output. Another DEIB may or may not work. Only
some DEIBS have this problem with the tri-stated signals. (There are no reports of similar problems
with the DIB).
1999 Rev. F 5-36
5-4-4. DEIB Converts Host Parallel Data to Serial and Transfers it to the FIB
The DEIB converts the parallel data to serial data, and transfers it to the FIB (or input module). The rate of
the serial transmission between DEIB and FIB (or input module) is determined by the jumpers on the DEIB
(matching jumpers on the input module.) For the DryView 8700/8500 they must be set to 10 MHZ.
ERROR STATE: If the jumpers are set incorrectly, EC39 “EIB not detected” will result.
5-4-5. IPB Reads Header Data from Host

In Header mode, when the IPB receives the first line of data (header) from the host it will set aside space in
memory to receive the upcoming image data.
At this point, the image size as sent from the host can be viewed using MPC/images/show.
Note
Be sure you are in Header mode in the MPC DEIB/DIB screen. If you are in Ignore Header mode, the
values displayed for image size will be the ones in the MPC DEIB/DIB screen for pixel and image
lines.
The pixel and Image line values remain in memory until the images are printed. If the acquires are
failing, the values remain in memory between the start of the acquire and the failure of the acquire.
ERROR STATE: If no header information is seen, and there is also no STROBE change of state as
described in step 2, the host is not sending any data (or the cable between host/ and DEIB/DIB is bad).
ERROR STATE: If the header information in MPC is invalid (Example: 0 pixels, 0 lines), the host is sending
invalid data.
1999 Rev. F 5-37
5-4-6. IPB Sets REQUEST Line Low While it Finds Best Memory Fit for Image
After the IPB has successfully received the header information (pixels and lines in the image), it causes the
REQUEST line to go low while it recalculates the best fit in memory.
Xmt LED goes off. During normal transmission the off state occurs so fast that is cannot be usually
detected.
DEIB
Port 0 Port 1
8700–314L
Figure 5-29.
ERROR STATE: If the DryView 8700/8500 reply to the header information takes longer than the host is
willing to wait (host wait timing is out of spec).
The host will error out and stop sending data with a resultant EC68 Acquire Timeout.
Or, the host will send the header twice (the IPB will be expecting the second transmission to be image
data, and it will error out with EC59 – No EOT (End of Transmission)
Solution:
Set MPC/Setup/IMS/System/Memory management to First Fit. This speeds up the DryView 8700/8500
reply after the header data, but will result in slightly decreased memory performance. If this does not
solve the problem, try the following additional step.
Set MPC/Setup/EIB/Config/Header Mode to Ignore Header Line. (This will also speed up the DryView
8700/8500 reply to the host header). Enter the values for Pixels Per Line and Image Lines that you
retrieved earlier from the Image/Show screen.
Note
This can only be done if the host only sends one size image. If the host changes image sizes, Ignore
Header Mode cannot be used.
1999 Rev. F 5-38
5-4-7. IPB Requests First Line of Image Data

After the IPB has found the best fit (or first fit) in memory, it will then assert the REQUEST line high again,
and the host should respond with the STROBE line going high for each pixel in the first line of the image
data. This process of REQUEST high from the DEIB/DIB – STROBE high from host for each pixel in the
line –– REQUEST low from DEIB/DIB – repeats for each line of data.
The STROBE frequency is the digital transfer rate of the host.
ERROR STATE: If the digital transfer rate (STROBE signal in megahertz) of the host is above 4
megapixels, the IPB will not be able to process the data as fast as the host is trying to send, and EC68
will result. The solution is to have the OEM set their host to a 952 setup.
– The DryView 8700/8500 maximum acceptable digital transfer rate is 4 Megapixels. (969 is 6
Mpixel. 959 is 4 Mpixel. 952 is 1 Mpixel.
– If the camera setup screen of the host is set to 952, the rate will be 1 MPixel (1 Megahertz strobe
rate). 959 is 4 Mpixel, 969 is 6 Megapixel.
Note
PC digital tester and DDR digital transfer rate is .25 Mpixel.
ERROR STATE: If the IPB does not receive the EOT (end of transmission 0000 0001) from the host at
the end of the last line, the acquire will fail with EC59 displayed. This could occur if the number of lines
or pixels in the header was different from the actual image data.
1999 Rev. F 5-39
5-4-8. REQUESTS/STROBE Signal Troubleshooting Table
Logic Probe Symptom MPC Symptom Cause Solution

Request line does not Wrong port selected in Check port setup in
go high. (TX LED on MPC. MPC.
DEIB does not light)
Check which port
LED on the DEIB
lights during an
acquire.
Request stays high for MPC/Image/Show does Host is not responding Check cabling or
timeout period set in not show any header with a Strobe pulse. host.
MPC. EC68. data.
Check Strobe line
from the host.
Request and Strobe MPC/Image/Show 1. If This is a Siemens 1. If this is a Siemens
change states, but contains image size if modality, see note in modality, see note in
acquires fail with EC59 EC68. If acquires are event 3 of this event 3 of this
or EC68. failing with EC59, no document. document.
header data will be 2. Host has sent the 2. Try First fit in MPC. If
available in MPC. header, but has the problem remains,
Example: timed out waiting for also try Ignore
512 pixels 512 lines the response from header mode in
(Header information is the DryView MPC.
displayed in MPC until 8700/8500.
acquire timeout is 3. Host digital transfer 3. OEM tech must
exceeded.) rate is too fast. configure their
system to 952. This
slows down the
transfer rate to 1
Mpixel.
4. Actual image size 4. Verify image size
(pixels and line) is with OEM. Try ignore
different than header. header mode.
5. Header and/or image 5. Try DEIB SMPTE
data is corrupted Eproms or PC with
from host or through digital tester.
cable.
Gain and Black Level Theory and Adjustment

1999 Rev. F 5-40
5-4-9. Gain and Black Level Theory

The following Gain and Black level check and adjustment should be done after all other framing and fine
tuning is done. Refer to the VEIB operation document in the Video appendix section of the 969
QuickSheets for why this is true.
The black level value in MPC is a measure of the video amplitude from the sync tip to the darkest black in
the customer’s image (usually step 1 of the greyscale, and the 0% block of a SMPTE). This value tells the
VEIB how many millivolts above the sync tip to start digitizing the video. The VEIB will then digitize the
video signal starting at the black level with a value of 0, and ending 2 volts later at a value of 510. The
following example illustrates a perfectly digitized video signal.
Note
All examples are for illustration purposes only and are not drawn to scale.
Dmax = 3.0 : Contrast = 1

This value is 1020 for
HQ Film
the VIB and EVEIB.
Step 16 510 (mapped to density .14)

508 (mapped to density .16)
2
v
o
l
t
s
Step 1 2 (mapped to density 2.8)

0 (mapped to density 3.0)
MPC Black Level
8700–315L
Figure 5-30.
The video signal in Figure 5-30 is digitized perfectly as evidenced by the fact that step 16 is given in a
value if 510 by the VEIB, and step 1 is given a value of 0.
1999 Rev. F 5-41
In Figure 5-31 we will observe noise in the video signal. The over white video could be caused by text in
the video image that is at a higher video amplitude than step 16, or could be video noise. The black below
step 1 in this case is probably noise in the video signal. This over white and below black video data can be
seen with a scope if it is obvious, but in some cases there may be only one or two pixels of over white or
below black level video and it will not be easily identifiable with a scope. In many cases, a sampling window
can be identified which does not include any over white or below black level video. However, in some
cases the sampling area defined in MPC does contain video data above step 16 or below step 1. This
causes the VEIB to set an incorrect black level and gain adjustment, and the following situation can occur.
Dmax = 3.0 : Contrast = 1

HQ Film
Over white
video.
510 (mapped to density .14)
Step 16 508 (mapped to density .16)
2
v
o
l
t
s

MPC Black Level is

set below Step 1.
Below black
level noise.
8700–316L
Figure 5-31.
Because of noise in the video signal, the VEIB has set an incorrect black level in this example. Since step 1
is now above black level, it is assigned a digital value of 2. The VEIB could find an incorrect black level if
the sampling window defined in MPC included either blanking or the noise below step 1. The visual effect
of the printed film from this example will be that step 1 is now at a density of 2.8 instead of 3.0.
The gain in Figure 5-31 has been set too low. This has probably occurred because the sampling window
defined in the MPC gain and black level adjustment procedure included the over white noise. The VEIB
found the over white noise, and thought it was maximum white. The result of printing this film is that step
16 no longer equals .14, but is darker at .16.
The next two sections deal with the following questions:
How do we know if our black level and/or white level is correct?
If one of them is off, what can we do about it?
1999 Rev. F 5-42
Determining Correct Black and White Level

A. Before checking black and white levels, we must first establish some definitions.
Image Dmin is the density of the step 16 of the customer’s greyscales.
Film Dmin is the density of the clear boarder immediately adjacent to step 16 on the same film.
Image Dmax is the density of the step 1 of the customer’s greyscales.
Film Dmax is the density of the clear border immediately adjacent to step 1 on the same film. (Match
Border in MPC is set to Yes.)
When Match Border is set to Yes, the image Dmax will equal the border Dmax.
Example: Match Border set to Yes. Dmax 2.8 results in a border of 2.8 and step 16 of the greyscale equal
to 2.8. If the black level in MPC were set too low, step 16 in this case would be lighter than the border.
If Match border was set to no, the border would be at maximum density (3.2 with a 969), and the Dmax of
the customers image would be at 2.8 in this example.
The first check of a perfect black and white level setting is that Image Dmin should equal Film Dmin, and
Image Dmax should equal Film Dmax.
Note
The density test and the customer’s film must be run using the same density and contrast settings.
Always use the lowest contrast setting available. Usually this is 1, because contrast 1 has the most
contrast at the ends of the greyscale as shown in Figure 5-32.
Example: With Dmax = 3.0 and contrast set to 1, run a density test and a customers film. If the Film
Dmax from the Density test = 3.0, than the Image Dmax off the customers film should also equal 3.0.
If the Film Dmin = .14, then the Image Dmin should equal .14.
Contrast 1 Contrast 14
Density
90%
95%
95% 90%
Dmin 100% Dmin 100%
Exposure 8700–317L
Figure 5-32.
1999 Rev. F 5-43
The difference between blocks on the SMPTE are printed with distinctly different densities using a low
contrast. However, when using a high contrast there is a little density difference between 100, 95 and 90%
blocks of the SMPTE pattern.
When printing films and measuring densities, using the lowest contrast available will give accurate results.
Using a higher contrast will give inaccurate results.
Note
With some OEMs, particularly ultrasound, you may have to ask them for a test pattern that will give
true whites and blacks in the customers image
To avoid confusing results from other factors that can affect density readings (such as sheet to sheet
variation, within sheet variation, lot number variation or developing variables), it is suggested that
densitometer measurements be taken on every film and on adjacent areas of the film.
Example: Measure the difference between Image Dmax at step 1 of the greyscale and film Dmax at the
immediately adjacent dark border on each sheet.
The same is true for Dmin measurements. Measure step 16 of the greyscale and compare it to the
immediately adjacent clear border of the film. Dmin measurements for DryView film must be taken on an
area at least 1/2 inch square and 1/2 inch away from a dark area. A smaller sampling area, such as
measuring the greyscale on a contrast test will give inaccurate results. Even if the aperture opening of the
densitometer is completely within the Dmin area, there is a carryover effect from adjacent dark areas that
will skew your results.
To get a clear border on the DryView 8700/8500, set MPC/Setup/Image/Borders to 4095 and run a print
from MPC. Be sure to set this back to 0 (black) when you are done.
If a greyscale is not available, a SMPTE can be used by cropping the image (increase vertical delay and
horizontal delay, and decrease image lines and horizontal active) to the point where the border on a print is
adjacent to the 100% and 0% blocks. Be sure to record the framing parameters before you change them.
Note
The 0% and 100% blocks of the SMPTE are the only areas of the SMPTE pattern that are at DMIN
and DMAX. The other black and white areas are not at true black and white.
1999 Rev. F 5-44
If Image Dmax = Film Dmax, we must do a second step to see if black level is set correctly. Using MPC,
decrease the the black level by one or two digits, acquire and print a film, and measure the Image Dmax
with a densitometer. If the original black level was set correctly, this new black level will result in an Image
Dmax slightly lighter than Film Dmax. Figure 5-33 illustrates this.
Original Black Level. Step MPC BL decreased by one from original.

1 = 3.0 density. Step 1 now measures 2.8 density.
Step 16 Step 16
2 2
v v
o o
l l
t t
s s
2 (mapped to
density 2.8) 2 (mapped to
Step 1 Step 1 density 2.8)
0 (mapped to
density 3.0) 0 (mapped to
density 3.0)
MPC Black
Level value MPC value
in millivolts. in millivolts.
8700–318L
Figure 5-33.
1999 Rev. F 5-45
If the Image Dmax does not lighten when the original black level value is decreased by 1 or 2, the VEIB is
misadjusted and the example 4 shows why:
Original BL. Black Level decreased by one.

Step 1 = 3.0 Step 1 still equals 3.0
Step 16
2 2
v v
o o
l l
t t
s s
Step 2 Step 2
0 (mapped to
Step 1 density 3.0) Step 1 0 (mapped to
density 3.0)
MPC value in MPC value

millivolts. decreased
by one from
original.
8700–319L
Figure 5-34.
Figure 5-34 shows an original black level that is set too high. Remember that all video data at and below
black level will be digitized as 0. Therefore, the original black level digitizes Image Dmax to 0. When the
black level is decreased by one, step 1 is still digitized as 0. This test proves that the original black level is
incorrect.
Note
Once again, you must use a contrast setting of 1 (or whatever is the lowest contrast setting) on all the
proceeding and following procedures.
1999 Rev. F 5-46
C. The same idea is true for the white level. If Image Dmin = Film Dmin, then we must make a second
check to insure that the white level is set correctly. If the gain is set correctly and Image Dmin = Film Dmin
then increasing the original black level value in MPC by 4 to 6 digits will make the Image Dmin of the next
print darker than the Film Dmin as illustrated in Figure 5-35.
Note
It can take a 4 to 6 digit increase to see Image Dmin darken.
Original White Level. Black Level increased by two.

Step 16 = .14 Step 16 now is printed at .16.
510
Step 16 510 = .14
density Step 16 508 = .16
2 2
v v
o o
l l
t t
s s
2 (mapped to
density 2.8)
0 (mapped to
Step 1 0 (mapped to Step 1 density 3.0)
density 3.0)
MPC Black
MPC Black Level value
Level value increased
in millivolts. by 4 from
original.
8700–320L
Figure 5-35.
D. If the above tests prove that black and white levels are set correctly, return the black level value to it’s
original setting.
1999 Rev. F 5-47
If the above tests show that black and white levels are incorrect, then one of the following scenarios is true:
Scenario 1.
510
508
Step 16
2
v
o
l
t
s

MPC Black Level

is set too low.
8700–321L
Figure 5-36.
In Scenario #1, (Figure 5-36) the black level is set too low, and the gain pot is set too low. This situation is
not too bad. Data is not being truncated; it is simply not digitizing the customers image across the full two
volt, 510 digital value range. Instead we are only using values 2-508. Density readings of the Image Dmin
would be darker than Film Dmin and the Image Dmax would be lighter than Film Dmax.
1999 Rev. F 5-48
Scenario 2.
Step 16 510 = Density .14

508 = Density .16
2
v
o
l
t
s

MPC Black Level is

set too low.
8700–322L
Figure 5-37.
In Scenario #2 (Figure 5-37), the situation is a little better. Although the Black level is still incorrect, with
Step one getting a value of 2, the gain is set correctly so that step 16 is digitized at 510.
1999 Rev. F 5-49
Scenario #3.
510 = Density .14
508 = Density .16
Step 16
2
v
o
l
t
s

MPC Black Level is

set correctly.
8700–323L
Figure 5-38.
In Scenario #3 (Figure 5-38), the situation again is not catastrophic. Now the black level is set correctly, but
the gain of the video signal is set too low. The Image Dmin will be darker at 16. We are digitizing the
customer image across a smaller range, but at least we are not truncating any data.
Scenario #4.
Step 16
510
508
2
v
o
l
t
s
2 (mapped to
density 2.8)
0 (mapped to
Step 1 density 3.0)
MPC Black Level is

set too high.
8700–336L
Figure 5-39.
This is the worst case situation. We are truncating data at both ends. A printed film would show that steps 1
and 2 are blended together and have little or no visual distinction. Steps 15 and 16 would also be blended
together and have little or no visual distinction between them.
1999 Rev. F 5-50
Black Level White Level Check: PERFECT, Excellent, POOR, and Unacceptable.
The following checks involve checking gain and black level by printing films and measuring densities.
1. If Image Dmin = Film Dmin and Image Dmax = Film Dmax, then either the film is PERFECT or it is
UNACCEPTABLE.
2. If increasing the black level value by one causes image Dmin to become darker than film Dmin and
decreasing the black level value by one causes image Dmax to become lighter than film Dmax then the
gain and black level are set up perfectly.
This degree of accuracy has two disadvantages:
a. If can be time consuming to achieve this.
b. If Image Dmax and Image Dmin exactly equal Film Dmax and Dmin on contrast test #1, the only
way to know if black and white levels are set correctly is to bump the MPC value of black level up,
and then down by one, and measure the densities to see if they have moved accordingly. This may
seem fine for the person who originally sets up the modality, but will be time consuming for another
technician who later inspects the gain/black level.
3. If decreasing black level by one does not cause Image Dmax to lighten, or if increasing black level by
one or two does not cause the white level to darken, then the gain/black level adjustment is
unacceptable. Either of these two situations would be an indicator that you are cutting off data, and
have a black level that is too high, or a gain setting that is too high. Although Image Dmax = Film Dmax
and Image Dmin=Film Dmin, the customers film would show that the 5% and/or 100% patches are faint
or missing. On a greyscale, the effect would be that the first two steps at each end of the greyscale
would blend together, or have minimal distinction between them. Since this visual distinction is so
subjective, the only objective way to know if gain/black level is set correctly (when Image Dmin and
Dmax equal Film Dmin and Dmax) is to use MPC and key in the values above and then below the
original black level and measure the film densities accordingly.
4. If Image Dmin is slightly darker (within .01 for DryView film) than Film Dmin and Image Dmax is slightly
lighter (within .1 for DryView film) than Film Dmax, then the gain/black level settings are excellent.
There are two options in determining how far away from perfect you are.
Option 1: Decrease black level in MPC until Image Dmin just equals Film Dmin. You now know that
your original setting is within xx black level values of perfect regarding the gain of the image. Then,
increase the black level in MPC (starting from the original setting) until Image Dmax just equals Film
Dmax. Again, you now know you are within xx black level values of a perfect black level setting.
Option 2: Run 1:1 prints at contrasts of 1 through 4. If Image Dmin and Dmax equal Film Dmin and
Dmax on contrast #2, then you are close to perfect. If they equal each other on contrast #3, then you
are further away from perfect.
An excellent setting of the VEIB has the following advantage:
The VEIB often seeks to this level automatically.
You are assured that you are not over saturating the image.
5. If Image Dmin is significantly darker (>.01 Dry) than Film Dmin or Image Dmax is significantly lighter
(>.1 Dry) than Film Dmax, then the gain black level adjustment is poor. This has the following
disadvantages:
a. We are not using the full range of digitization possible.
b. Image Dmin may appear too dark and the Image Dmax may appear too light.
1999 Rev. F 5-51
There are two possible solutions to any of the above situations where the VEIB is not finding black or white
level accurately.
1. Try the following solutions:
Continue to use the same image, but select a different sampling area in the MPC screen.
Bring up a different image and try the gain/black level adjustment again.
Window and level the image with extreme whites and blacks.
If using a SMPTE pattern, be sure that the window and level values are at the OEM defined values.
Try cropping the image (increase vertical delay, decrease limes, increase horizontal delay, decrease
horizontal active) to clearly identify what the sampling area is and to be sure that it does not include
any over white or under dark video. Be sure to record the correct values before you change them.
2. Manually adjust the gain/black level per the following section.
5-4-10. Manual Adjustment Procedure for Gain/Black Level
Note
This is a time consuming procedure and should only be done when necessary. For example, when
Image Dmin or Dmax is out or spec. and normal MPC fine tuning does not achieve the desired
results.
1. Adjust the VEIB using MPC gain/black level adjustment.

2. This will often result in a setup which produces an image Dmin darker than film Dmin, and an image
Dmax that is lighter than film Dmax. It is essential that contrast #1 is used when printing films and
measuring Dmin and Dmax.
The following are essential:
The starting point for this adjustment has image Dmin darker than film Dmin, and image Dmax
lighter than film Dmax.
Write on each film the following information – film #1, 2, 3, etc. What black level film was printed at.
How far the gain pot (or gain parameter for VIB or EVEIB) was turned since the last film.
Adjustment Notes:
Gain Pot Operation: CCW rotation increases the video gain – makes all the steps lighter. CW rotation
decreases the video gain – makes all the steps darker.
Gain Value Operation (VIB or EVEIB): Increasing the gain value makes all the steps lighter. Decreasing
the gain value makes all the steps darker.
1999 Rev. F 5-52
Black Level Adjustment: Increasing the Black level value darkens all the steps. Decreasing the black
level lightens all the steps.
3. Use the following procedure for manually adjusting the gain/black level.
a. If the Image Dmax is lighter than Film Dmax, increase the black level value in MPC by 1 (this
causes all the steps of the greyscale to print out darker), then print another film. The Image Dmax
on the film should now be closer to Film Dmax than on the previous film. Keep increasing the black
level value in MPC until Image Dmax is within one black level value of Film Dmax.
b. By darkening the Image Dmax, the Image Dmin also darkens. Increase the VEIB gain by turning the
appropriate pot 1/4 turn counterclockwise (or increase the gain parameter value for VIB or EVEIB
by 2 units). Print another film. Now Image Dmin will be lighter in respect to Film Dmin than it was on
the previous film.
c. Image Dmin has now lightened, but so has Image Dmax. This interactive procedure continues,
repeating steps b and c until Image Dmin and Dmax are within 1 black value of Film Dmin and
Dmax.
4. If the black level is set too low, acquires may fail as shown in the following figure.
Step 16 510
508
2
v
o
l
t
s
Step 1
MPC Black Level is set below

the top of the sync pulse.
8700–337L
Figure 5-40.
5. Place a note on a piece of cloth tape covering the gain pot of the VEIB.
6. Set framing parameters back to normal. Set Match borders to desired setting. Set Borders back to
black (0). Run clinical images and have the customer select Dmax and contrast levels.
1999 Rev. F 5-53
5-5. Image Processing
5-5-1. Optics Power Mapping and Laser Path Diagram

At power up, the laser diode intensity range and the attenuator positioning range are mapped (Refer to
Optics Theory of Operation for more details.) As a result of this mapping, the SCB has determined the
laser diode intensity and attenuator dynamic range.
The following diagram illustrates the basic imaging of a sheet of film.
Scan #1000 Scan #1
Optics Module Laser Path Optics Platen
Laser Attenuator Y-Galvo X-Galvo

Diode Mirror Mirror
Optics Platen Access Door
Beam Power
Monitor Board
8700–277L
Figure 5-41.
1999 Rev. F 5-54
5-5-2. Calibrate Sheet Imaging

As can be seen from the following diagram, a calibrate sheet completely by passes the IPB. A calibrate
sheet can be run without an IPB installed. Example: DryView 8700/8500 Dual Printer.
Laser Diode intensity controlled by

image data from SCB.
LOS (Laser Optics System)

Imaging Processing
Board (IPB) OEB Laser Diode
The user image

data lines from
Attenuator
IPB to Optics
Module are NOT
used during a
calibrate sheet. Y
A/D
Attenuator Power
Cable
LOS
Control
Cable
MIB
System Controller Board (SCB)

Control and timing signals Attenuator is not
(Image data sent through this cable moved
on a calibrate sheet only.) during imaging.
8700–325L
Figure 5-42.
1. During a calibrate sheet the attenuator is not moved.

2. The OEB (optics engine board) controls the X and Y galvos under direction from the SCB and does the
A/D conversion of the digital image data from the SCB.
3. Density for each step is determined by the data on the image data lines of the control cable from the
SCB.
1999 Rev. F 5-55
As a result of the calibrate sheet and densitometer feedback, the SCB knows what film densities will be
achieved with a given exposure (laser intensity):
The SCB has established an attenuator position that causes a digital value of 0 from the host to result
in the Dmax set by the user. The attenuator only changes if Dpatch variation is outside of limits (refer to
AIQC theory of operation for more details).
The SCB has calculated the contrast tables necessary to image a film. (TFT’s reside on the SCB. LUT’s
are generated from the TFT’s and calibrate sheet data.) The generated LUT’s are then downloaded to
the IPB at powerup or anytime the IPB requests a new LUT.
Besides contrast tables the following data is also requested by the IPB and sent from the SCB:
Dpatch value
Border density value
5-5-3. IPB Imagining

Print Sequence:
Print Command: The IPB initiates a print by issuing a print command to the SCB. The SCB picks up a
film and transports it to the optics platen.
The IPB waits for the SOL (start of line) signal from the optics module. When it detects SOL, it then
sets the STROBE line active and puts the 12 bit data on the data lines for the first pixel.
The IPB makes the STROBE line active for each pixel across the width of the film. Input data from
sheet. The IPB counts each SOL. If it does not receive the full expected SOL counts EC126 is logged.
Refer to EC126 for more details.
The OEM (Optics Engine Board) under direction from the SCB.
– is controlling the x and y galvo’s to scan across the down the film during imaging
– does the A/D conversion of the digital data from the IPB.
– output an EOL (or LINESYNC) signal to the SCB after each line. The SCB counts each EOL signal
and advances the Y galvo until the full number of lines for a page is reached.
The attenuator does not change during imaging.
All user image data is generated through the IPB and sent across the IPB DATA cable to the optics
module. This includes Dpatch, Boarder, User ID, and user image.
TECH TIP
Using the Digital Test Board, send 256 grays test image. If any of the 256 steps are missing, a bit is being
dropped somewhere along the image path. Typically, a loose or bad data cable from the SCB (or HIB) can
cause this problem. The optics module may also be bad.
1999 Rev. F 5-56
IPB Imaging Diagram for 9 bit Memory

1. Data from Host.
DIB or DEIB (8 bit)
EVIEB and VEIB (9 bit)
VIB (10 bit)
3. Memory Daughter
IPB Board 6. Laser Diode intensity controlled
Image is stored in by image data from IPB.
2. Scale LUT 9
memory until printing
drops the LSB bit
starts.
from the data to
9=512 grays. LOS (Laser Optics System)
fit into the
memory size.
OEB Laser Diode
Density and
contrast test. 4. Image data
Attenuator
sent through the
interpolation and
magnification D/A
filter. Y
12 bit
12 bit Data X
image Cable
data
5. Image data is
shaped through Strobe
Contrast LUT (10
bit). SOL
EOL Attenuator Power

Cable
Serial Cable SCB to IPB.
LOS
Control
Cable MIB
(SCB)
7. Control and timing signals 8. Attenuator is
to/from Optics Module. not moved
during imaging.
8700–331L
Figure 5-43.
1999 Rev. F 5-57
5-5-4. Print Sequence Communication Log between Keypad, IPB, and SCB
SCB IPB 969 Keypad
S:1,P:0,Rx:FMT ID=202 MEDIA=BWGEN,

E14x17 1. 969 keypad user initiates
S:1,P:0,Tx:Fmt Y a density test and the
keypad downloads format,
S:1,P:0,Rx:BOX ID=100 FMT=202 LOC=0,0 Smooth or Sharp, and
SIZE=840,103 BETA=0,0 CON=31 Contrast to IPB.
S:1,P:0,Tx:Box Y
S:1,P:0,Rx:STO ASC=7184 MSG=” DMAX 1.80
Contrast 7 \n”
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sto Y size=280,23
S:1,P:0,Rx:PRI FMT=202 IMG=7183,7184,7170 2. 969 keypad sends print

DENS=7169 command to IPB.
S:1,P:0,Tx:Pri Y Job=7
3. IPB commands SCB to

start print.
SCB
immediately S:0,P:0,Tx:PR 2
starts picking S:0,P:0,Rx:Y 10
up film.
4. 969 keypad requests
S:1,P:0,Rx:SHOW MEM update of memory
S:1,P:0,Tx:Show Y available and displays
Mem=32768,16572,4,6,328 Memory Free 98%.
5. SCB reports
S:0,P:0,Tx:SH SH=10
that sheet is
S:0,P:0,Rx:Y SH=10,Q
queued.
8700–332L
The SCB picks up and transports film to the optics platen.
When the SCB detects film in the platen (platen bottom sensor actuated), it sets up the optics
module to give the SOL signal to the IPB.
When the IPB sees the SOL from the optics module, it starts strobing the image data to the
optics module.
After the last line of the sheet is imaged, the SCB kicks the film out of the optic platen using the
kicker solenoid.
When the film leaves the platen bottom sensor, the SCB tells the IPB that the sheet is exposed.
Figure 5-44.
1999 Rev. F 5-58
SCB IPB 969 Keypad
7. SCB reports S:0,P:0,Tx:SH SH=10

that sheet is S:0,P:0,Rx:Y SH=10,E
exposed. (Film
has left platen,
exposure bottom S:1,P:0,Rx:STA 8. 969 keypad requests
sensor S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y Job=4 status, and the IPB informs
deactuated.) the keypad that the print has
S:1,P:0,Rx:STA JOB=4 left the optics platen.
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y Pri Print=1,0,0
Proc=0,0,1 Wait
S:1,P:0,Rx:DEL IMG=7183 9. 969 keypad requests

S:1,P:0,Tx:Del Y delete job 7 from memory.

S:1,P:0,Rx:SHOW MEM
S:1,P:0,Tx:Show Y Mem=32768,16828,4,6,72 update of memory available
and displays Memory Free
99%.
11. SCB reports to
IPB that it is still S:0,P:0,Tx:SA
printing. (Film in S:0,P:0,Rx:y MS=7 ML PR
transport.) (printing)
12. SCB S:0,P:0,Tx:SH SH=10

reports that sheet S:0,P:0,Rx:Y SH=10,D
10 is done.
(Transport exit
sensor
deactuated.)
S:1,P:0,Rx:STA JOB=7
S:1,P:0,Tx:Sta Y Pri 13. IPB informs 969 keypad
Print=1,0,0 Proc=1,0,0 Done that job 7 is done.
S:1,P:0,Rx:SHOW MEM
S:1,P:0,Tx:Show Y
memory update, and displays
Mem=32768,16828,4,6,72
results on keypad.
8700–333L
Figure 5-45.
1999 Rev. F 5-59
5-5-5. Scan Lines, Total Pixels, and Image Size
5-5-5-1. Total Scan Lines

There are 5596 scan lines down a sheet of film.
If Clear Border Lines in (MPC/Setup/SCP/Config) is set to 60, then there are 5536 scan lines down a
sheet of film.
The HQ keypad uses 5337 lines to include the Dpatch, User ID, and user image boxes.
The maximum number of lines a host can define is shown in Section 5-5-5-3.
TECH TIP
Clear Border Lines at the bottom of a sheet of film have NOT been imaged by the laser. If the clear border
is not clear, the film is fogged. This assumes the sheet is not physically mispositioned in the optics platen
area. If the film is mispositioned, the Dpatch will also be out of spec.
5-5-5-2. Total Image Pixels

There are 4364 pixels across a sheet of film. 4096 pixels can be used for image area, the rest are for
outside border and between image border.
5-5-5-3. Maximum User Image Size

The maximum image size for the Imation Laser Imagers are as follows:
14” x 17” maximum image size with PIXEL CORRECTION OFF (magnification of 1, slides set to
super)
Model Largest DZO Largest Acquirable Image

8700/8500 5222 lines – (min 6 for top border) 4096 pixels x 5216 lines
969 5002 lines – (min 6 for top border) 4096 pixels x 4996 lines
14” x 17” maximum image size with PIXEL CORRECTION ON (magnification of 1, slides set to
super) Pixel Correction Yes (on) magnifies the acquired image by 1.038333333333.
Model Largest DZO Largest Acquirable Image

8700/8500 4800 lines – (min 6 for top border) 3944 pixels x 4794 lines
1999 Rev. F 5-60
5-5-5-4. User Image Size – What Affects It

There are 5 factors which determine the size of the users image on a 14” x 17” sheet of film. In some cases
a combination of factors from both host and/or MPC setup parameters may combine to cause the format to
fail when attempting to print an image.
Image line size and magnification parameter in the DZO command from the host:
DZO, lines, top, type, horizontal magnification, vertical magnification.
Example: DZO,512,60,3,0,0= 512 lines, 60 top border lines, 3 images across the page, default
magnification to the laser imager.
Aspect ratio for 952 command set users is defined in the MPC/Host screen.
Note
MPC aspect ratio parameter only applies when the host defaults magnification by sending a DZO as
follows: DZO, x,x,x,x,0,0 (third and fourth argument are zeros).
Aspect Ratio for 969 command set users is defined in the MPC/Keypad screen.
MPC\Pixel Correction: Yes or No. Yes magnifies the users image lines and pixels by a factor of
1.038333333333 for a 969 printer and 1.083666 for a DryView 8700/8500 printer. (Pixel correction
magnifies images from the host to the appropriate laser resolution. 959 has 300 DPI, 969 has 311.5
DPI, and DryView 8700/8500 has 325.2 DPI).
(DryView 8800 only) MPC\Slides – Super or 35mm. Slides parameter only applies to images with
horizontal and vertical magnification of 1 in the DZO (example: DZO,x,x,x,1,1,...). This includes, but is
not limited to, slide size images. (For example, workstations that send one large image use 1,1
magnifications.)
Super slides leave the magnification unchanged at 1,1. 35 mm reduces the magnification to less than 1
(minimization). Note that minimization can only be accomplished while maintaining the aspect ratio of
the original image.
Scale format applies only to smaller than 14” x 17” film sizes when the host sends the DZO command.
Scale magnification applies only to smaller than 14” x 17” film sizes when the host sends the SFO
command.)
If the DZO magnification, aspect ratio, pixel correction, and slides parameters combine to produce an
image size that is larger than the laser imager can handle, the DZO will fail. Example of a failed DZO:
969 Laser Imager
Host sends: DZO, 5002, 6,1,1...
Image size 4096 pixels by 4996 lines.
Pixel correction YES.
The maximum number of lines in a DZO for the model 969 is 5002. But with Pixel Correction on, the
number of lines reaches 5193. (5002 x 1.038333333333=5193).
The DZO will fail: FAI, SET DZO,5002, 6,1,1.....
1999 Rev. F 5-61
5-5-5-5. DZO Example with Pixel Corrections

In the following example,
the host has sent four DZO’s each with 1200 lines in it.
it has specified 60 top border lines in each zone.
it has specified 3 images in each zone.
it has left the magnification at 0,0 (default to laser)
Border
S:1,P:1,Rx:DZO 1200 60 3 0 0 HAA 1 5 2 5 3 5 Zone 1

S:1,P:1,Tx:PAS
S:1,P:1,Rx:DZO 1200 60 3 0 0 HAA 3 B 3 B 3 B Zone 2
S:1,P:1,Tx:PAS 4800 lines
S:1,P:1,Rx:DZO 1200 60 3 0 0 HAA 3 B 3 B 3 B Zone 3
S:1,P:1,Tx:PAS
S:1,P:1,Rx:DZO 1200 60 3 0 0 HAA 3 B 3 B 3 B
Zone 4
S:1,P:1,Tx:PAS
8700–334L
Figure 5-46.
The actual image size as recorded in MPC/Image/Show is 529 by 525. Since the magnification is left to
the laser imager, it calculates the maximum magnification that will fit three 529 by 525 images within
the zone (1149 lines by 4096 pixel zone), while still maintaining the original aspect ratio of the image as
defined in MPC/IMS/HOST.
If MPC Pixel Correction is set to YES and the printer type is 969, the number of lines is magnified to
4984. Thus each zone now has 1200 x 1.038333333333 = 1246 lines, and the users image is also
magnified proportionally.
Border
Zone 1
Zone 2
4984 lines
Zone 3
Zone 4
8700–335L
Figure 5-47.
5-5-5-6. Custom Format Size Limitations

Custom format keypad configuration files:
Can be done only on an DryView 8800 (not an DryView 8700/8500 standalone unit)
Must have the same number of lines in a horizontal row.
1999 Rev. F 5-62
5-5-6. Image Memory

Available Image Memory
To determine the available image memory, monitor communications to a 969 keypad at power up or
after an acquire: (or use your PC to send the command).
Example:
S:1,P:1,REX:SHOW MEM
S:1,P:1,TX:Show Y Mem=32768,16828,4,6,16
HQ Keypad requests memory remaining and displays results. 32 meg, 16 meg largest contiguous
block, 4K of holes, 6K bad, 16K used.
Example: A 32 MB memory board could have 30 MB mapped as bad. The keypad would show 100%
memory available if no images are in memory. The memory test would show the good 2MB as passing,
but the user would experience memory full problems because there is really only 2MB of usable
memory.
HQ Keypad displays % of image memory free: Memory Free 100%. This display is dynamically
updated.
MPC/Utilities/Version shows the type of board in the machine (32MB or 16MB). It does not show the
available image memory of the module. The MPC screen is not dynamic and is only read at MPC
initialization.
Slot =1
Memory Size = 32
Memory Width = 9
Note
MPC/Diag only tests 32 MB maximum. If you have more in the system and wish to test it, you must
swap boards in and out of the first 1 or 2 slots.
Note
MPC attempts to run the memory test on the amount of memory that MPC read when MPC first
started up. For example, when you start up MPC it reads two 16MB memory boards (32MB total). If
you remove one board, but do not refresh MPC. The MPC will try to read 32 MB and will fail the
memory test.
Memory boards must be installed in order. For example, install J1, then J2, etc.
If you replace a memory board that has many bad blocks, you must clear the IPB memory mapping
NVRAM, or the IPB will keep the same map for the new board you install.
To clear IPB memory mapping: MPC/File/Restore on c:\winmpc\CLBADBLK.IM_
Example: CLBADBLK.IM1 for slot 1
1999 Rev. F 5-63
5-5-7. Contrast/DMax and Density Settings
5-5-7-1. Problem Situations

The following text shows the options for density and contrast control.
Problem: Reverse images (negative) with host control
The host is sending a contrast table of 16 or higher in the DZO command. Note that 1 through 15 are
positive contrast tables, and 16 through 30 are negative.
Example: DZO,x,x,x,x,x,x,5 16 6 16 7 16 8 16
Images 5,6,7,8 are all printed at a contrast of 16. This will be a negative image.
Problem: User changes at local panel do not change user’s image.
Cause: Host command language is controlling density and/or contrast.
Solution: Be aware of who is controlling density and contrast.
Cause: Contrast test is using Dmax and/or density settings in MPC/IMS/Image, but the user images
using the host command language is bypassing the MPC value.
Solution: Be aware of who is controlling density for the user prints.
1999 Rev. F 5-64
5-5-7-2. Dmax/Density Control with AIQC ACTIVE
952 Host Command Dmax in NVRAM Local Panel Display User Film Printed At
Host sends STP,1,D NVRAM value is used Dmax 3.0 Dmax 3.0
(Setup to print, 1 copy, (Example: Dmax = 3.0)
default to density in
NVRAM.)
Host sends STP,1,6 NVRAM Dmax value of Dmax 3.0 Dmax 2.2
(setup to print, 1 copy, 3.0 is ignored. Note: User films are
density 6)Software printed at 2.2. However,
calculates an equivalent a contrast test for this
Dmax value according user will be at the
to the following formula: NVRAM value of 3.0.
1.6 +density/10 1.6 +
6/10 = 2.2
Host sends SDN, 11 Dmax 2,7 Dmax 2.7 The SDN command only
(SetDensity, 11) changes NVRAM Dmax
Software calculates an value, it does not initiate
equivalent Dmax and a print.
overwrites NVRAM
Dmax. (1.6+11=2.7)
969 Command Set Dmax in NVRAM++ Local Panel Display Film Printed At
Set Dmax = 200 2.00 2.00 2.00
1999 Rev. F 5-65
5-5-7-3. Dmax/Density Control with AIQC OFF
959 Host Command Dmax and Density Local Panel Display User Film Printed At
values in NVRAM
STP,1,D Dmax 3.0 Density 4 Both Dmax and Density
(host defaults density to Density 4 used to image film.
NVRAM values.)
STP,1,6 Dmax 3.0 Density 4 Both Dmax of 3.0 and
(Host controls density) Density 4 (NVRAM host density of 6 are
density is ignored) used to image film. Note
that a contrast print for
this user will use the
NVRAM values of Dmax
3.0 and density 4.
Host sends SDN,11 Dmax 3.0 The SDN command only

(SetDensity,11) Density 11 changes NVRAM Dmax
value, it does not initiate
Overwrite NVRAM a print.
density to 11.
969 Command Set Dmax in NVRAM++ Local Panel Display Film Printed At
Set den=10 (overwrite Dmax 3.0 Density 10 Dmax 3.0 and Density
Density in NVRAM) Density 10 10
For more information on the interaction of Dmax and Density in the AIQC OFF mode, refer to the MPC help
screen for Density.
1999 Rev. F 5-66
5-5-7-4. Contrast Control
952 Host Command Dmax in NVRAM Local Panel Display User Film Printed At
DZO .....14 Contrast 8 is ignored. Contrast 8 Contrast 14
Use contrast of 14. (last A contrast test for this
argument in the user will show the users
command string is the current contrast setting
contrast.) at 8.
1 – 15 positive
contrast tables
16 – 30 Negative
DZO....D Contrast 8 is used. Contrast 8 Contrast 8
(host defaults control of
contrast to DryView
8700/8500 NVRAM.)
PRI,x,x,,10,x,x) Contrast 8 is ignored. Contrast 8 Contrast 10
(Print with contrast of
10. Third argument.)
PRI,x,x,0,x,x) Contrast 8 is used. Contrast 8 Contrast 8
(default contrast to
NVRAM value)
SCN, 14 Contrast 14 Contrast 14
(Set Contrast NVRAM,
14) Overwrite NVRAM
to 14
Set Con = 11 Contrast 11 Contrast 11
(969 command set)
Overwrite NVRAM to 11.
1999 Rev. F 5-67
5-5-8. Contrast Test

Contrast test can print images with 1024 lines max.
When a contrast test is initiated, the IPB requests a contrast table at the current Dmax, and the SCB
will upload the contrast tables. During the download process from SCB to IPB, the SCB rotating
segment display will stop or go blank. This is because the SCB is too busy downloading the contrast
tables to update the segment display.
TECH TIP
The downloading of contrast tables from the SCB to the IPB can be observed during a contrast test using
MPC.
MPC/Monitor/Slot 0 (log of contrast table download)
S:0,P:0,TX:SH TB=13,200,0 (IPB requests SHow TaBle 13 at Dmax of 2.0)
S:0,P:0,RX:Y TB=868F45228C2118504CA4522D109A28A2D (SCB downloads contrast table)
148a60b46065305a6514ca) 2d30929968b4 c969965a49b2934d30da4d349b2d96d28cd....etc....etc....etc.
PROBLEM: Contrast test with host user does not work. The internal SMPE pattern is all that shows up.
CAUSE: The time it takes from host acquire to the film leaving the optics (and the users image being
deleted) is shorter than the time is takes to do the contrast test.
SOLUTION: Open the supply cartridge and have the host acquire and print an image. Initiate a contrast
test and wait 2 minutes. Close the cartridge and the contrast test should exit.

qs8700 - EC PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

qs8700 - EC PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Return to CD-ROM Collection Menu

Kodak DryView 8700/8500 Laser Imager

About this Guide

1-2. DryView 8700/8500 Standard Schematic (IMS and MCS)

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ 8700 Standard

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Modem/ Keypad

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ SOL MDB #1

ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ

1-3. DryView 8700/8500 Plus Schematic

8700 Plus KFEIB

Machine Interface Board

Section 2 – Error Code (EC) QuickSheets

2-1-1. Error Code Quick Index

Table 2-1. Error Code Quick Index

39 48 59 64 66 67 68V 68D 85 111 116 121

2-1-2. Error Code Descriptions

Table 2-2. Error Code Descriptions

EC39: EIB (or IB) not detected by IPB

EC48: No End of File (EOF)

EC59: IPB unable to load parameters to EIB (or IB)

DEIB or DIB Chip/ Non-inverting input Inverting input Output

General Troubleshooting Tips

EC64: IPB detected parity error during acquisition

EC67: Too many pixels received from EIB (or IB)

None. K72: Memory error. Try Acquir- L67 FIFO_OVERFLOW ALM,67

General Digital Troubleshooting Tips

DEIB or DIB Chip/ Non-inverting input Inverting input Output

General Troubleshooting Tips

EC85: Image memory is full

Phone Fix – Operator Correctable

1. Problem: Memory full condition locks up the host.

EC121: Optics module attenuator error

Phone Fix – Operator Correctable

EC122: Optics module not present

EC123: Optics module temp error

EC126: SCB unable to detect EOL signal from optics module

EC130: Supply door open

On Site – Technician Correctable

EC132: No supply cartridge

User rollback knob.

EC134: Cartridge is empty

EC151: Optics module PLL error

EC154: NVRAM error

EC161: Film jammed on multifeed detector

EC163: Jam to exposure

EC164: Jam exposure

EC165: Jam before processor

EC166: Film pickup problems

EC173: Platen door open

EC176: Supply cartridge could not be opened

EC177: Supply cartridge could not be closed

Phone Fix – Operator Correctable

EC178: Top cover open

EC179: Left side door open

On Site – Technician Correctable

EC202/203: Service override switch out (or fail)

P202 Override switch is open. None. None. None

On Site – Technician Correctable

EC204: Supply door interlock failed

EC205: Top cover interlock failed

SCB Sends to Switch SCB Interpretation of Interlock State

Refer to Section 4-6 for more detailed information.

EC206: Left side door interlock failed